Yamaha ELB 02_Owner's Manual Elb02 En Om C0

User Manual: Yamaha ELB-02_Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 215

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

ELB-02

Owner’s Manual
Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 4-5.
For information on assembling the instrument, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the
following:

Water warning

Power supply/Power cord

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses)
containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as
water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the
power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators.
Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy
objects on it.
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

Fire warning
Do not open
• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument
or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall
over and cause a fire.

If you notice any abnormality
• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power
switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device
inspected by Yamaha service personnel.
- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.
- It emits unusual smells or smoke.
- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.
- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

Power supply/Power cord

Location

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• When transporting or moving the instrument, always use two or more people.
Attempting to lift the instrument by yourself may damage your back, result in
other injury, or cause damage to the instrument itself.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used
for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage
to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them.
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off
the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power
switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum
level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug
the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Assembly
• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process.
Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in
damage to the instrument or even injury.
DMI-5

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

1/2

Connections

Using the bench (If included)

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,
set all volume levels to minimum.
• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and
gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the
desired listening level.

• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall
over.
• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or
stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the
possibility of accident or injury.
• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them
periodically using the specified tool in order to prevent the possibility of
accident or injury.

Handling caution
• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel
or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the
instrument or other property, or operational failure.

• Keep special watch over any small children so that they don’t fall off the rear of
the bench. Since the bench does not have a backrest, unsupervised use may
result in accident or injury.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
• Do not rest your legs or feet on the Expression Pedal or Pedal Box from the back
of the instrument, or climb on the instrument, or put excessive weight on it.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the [

] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.

When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

DMI-5

2/2

The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be
found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You
should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain
this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification
in the event of theft.

Model No.

The name plate is
located on the bottom
of the unit.

Serial No.
(bottom_en_01)

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property,
follow the notices below.

 Handling
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices.
Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on
your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid
noise caused by communication.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a
heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or
unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

 Maintenance
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or
chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
• During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur and water may collect on the surface of
the instrument. If water is left, the wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any water off
immediately with a soft cloth.

 Saving data
• Save your important Registration data onto the USB flash drive (page 116) since the Registration data memorized to the
instrument will be overwritten by certain operations, such as Song playback, etc. Before using a USB flash drive, make
sure to refer to page 132.
• A “” mark appears at the top left of the display indicating that the Registration data is currently being saved. Do not
turn the power off while the Registration is being saved, otherwise the data will be lost.
The Registration Shift settings and Keyboard Percussion settings will be automatically saved to the Registration data
when you switch to another display. While data is being saved, “” appears at the top left of the display indicating that
the Registration data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off without switching to another display or while
“” is shown in the display, otherwise the data will be lost.
• To protect against data loss through USB flash drive damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto a
spare USB flash drive as backup data.

Information
 About copyrights
• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly
prohibited except for your personal use.
• This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has
license to use others' copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute
media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the
product.
* The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score,
score data, etc.
* You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of
Yamaha Corporation is not required in such cases.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

 About functions/data bundled with the instrument
• This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data
for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or
composers originally intended.
• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

 About this manual
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear
somewhat different from those on your instrument.
• iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.
• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.

Compatible Format

“GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System Level 2” is a standard
specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased
polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice parameters, and integrated effect processing.

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically
to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and
to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.

GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major
enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well
as greater expressive control over Voices and effects.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Congratulations!
Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Electone!
We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage
of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that
you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

Included Accessories
 Owner’s Manual (this book)
 Playing the ELB-02 — Tutorial Guidebook
 Online Member Product Registration
The “PRODUCT ID” on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.
 Music Rest
Insert the music rest into the slots as shown.

 Dust Cover
Dust Cover

 Power Cord
 Bench

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

About the Manuals
This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.

Included Documents


Owner’s Manual (this book)
Provides overall explanations of the Electone functions.
Playing the ELB-02 — Tutorial Guidebook
This useful book helps you familiarize yourself with the Electone, giving you basic information on
playing the instrument, including the proper playing posture, and providing helpful music scores
which get you started playing the Electone using the preset Registration menu. This book also includes
information on how to record your performance to the USB flash drive, and listen back to your
recorded performances.

Online Materials (PDF)


iPhone/iPad Connection Manual
Explains how to connect this instrument to the iPhone/iPad.
MIDI Reference
Contains MIDI related information such as MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart.

To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads website, select your country, enter “ELB-02” in the
Model Name box, then click [Search].
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Contents
PRECAUTIONS.................................................................... 4
NOTICE ................................................................................ 6
Information............................................................................ 6
Congratulations! ................................................................... 8
Included Accessories............................................................ 8
About the Manuals................................................................ 9
Main Features..................................................................... 12

Panel Controls and Terminals

Overview............................................................................. 13
Front Panel ......................................................................... 14

Quick Introductory Guide

Power Supply .....................................................................
Turning On/Off the Power...................................................
Adjusting the Volume .........................................................
Adjusting the Contrast of the Display.................................
Using Headphones ............................................................

1 Basic Operation

16
16
17
18
19

Registration Menu .............................................................. 20
Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu.. 20
Registration Menu List ............................................... 22
Using the LCD display ....................................................... 25
Selecting from a list in the display ............................. 25
Selecting an item and changing its value.................. 25
Changing the Display Page ....................................... 26
Basic Operation.................................................................. 27
Selecting the Display Language................................ 27
Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)......................... 27
Confirming the Version of Your Electone ................... 28

2 Voices

Voices for Each Keyboard..................................................
Voice Display......................................................................
Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons ............................
Selecting Voices for Voice section 1..........................
Adjusting the Voice volume .......................................
Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2.................................
Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice
section 2 ..................................................................
Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2 .........................
Selecting Voices from the User buttons .............................
Voice List ............................................................................

3 Voice Controls and Effects

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

36
37
39
42

Selecting from the Voice Condition display .......................
Rotary Speaker ..........................................................
Selecting from the panel ....................................................
Reverb........................................................................
Sustain .......................................................................
Effect List............................................................................

29
31
33
33
34
36

53
60
61
61
63
64

4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons ...................... 68
To select and play a rhythm...................................... 68
Operating the rhythm from the panel ........................ 71
Adjusting the tempo .................................................. 73
Changing the rhythm volume/reverb......................... 74
Selecting rhythms from the User buttons .......................... 75
Rhythm List ........................................................................ 77
Accompaniment ................................................................ 79
Automatic Accompaniment—Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) .. 82
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) ............................................... 85
Keyboard Percussion ........................................................ 88
Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion .................... 88
Preset Keyboard Percussion List .............................. 90
Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion
.............................................................................. 101
Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion ............... 104
Kit Assign List.......................................................... 105

5 Registration Memory

111

Storing Registrations .......................................................
Selecting Registrations....................................................
Storing Registrations to Another Bank.............................
Deleting Banks ................................................................
Saving the Registration Data to USB Flash Drive............
Initializing Registration Memory.......................................
Registration Shift..............................................................

6 Music Data Recorder (MDR)

111
113
116
117
118
120
121

127

Calling Up the MDR Display............................................ 127
Using the MDR Display ................................................... 128
Song icons .............................................................. 130
Connecting a USB Device............................................... 132
Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal ................................................................. 132
Using USB Flash Drives .......................................... 132
Formatting a USB Flash Drive ......................................... 133
Selecting a Song ............................................................. 134
Recording ........................................................................ 138
Recording................................................................ 138
Re-recording (Retry) ............................................... 140
Recording Each Part Separately............................. 140
Punch-in Recording ................................................ 143
Changing the Song/Folder Name.................................... 144
Saving Registrations........................................................ 147
Saving Two or More Registration Units to One Song
.............................................................................. 149
Overwriting Registration data to a Unit ................... 151
Deleting Registrations ............................................. 152
Next Unit Settings (using more than 80 Registrations
in one performance) ............................................. 153
Recalling Recorded Registrations................................... 154
Loading Registrations ............................................. 154
Playing Back a Song ....................................................... 155
Playing Back Selected Parts ................................... 157
Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause ........................... 157

Changing the Tempo ...............................................
Repeat Playback......................................................
Playing Back XG Songs ...........................................
Other Operations — Copy, Delete, etc. ...........................
Copy.........................................................................
Song Delete/Folder Delete.......................................
Creating folders .......................................................
Converting to XG format ..........................................
Checking the Remaining Memory............................

7 Audio

169
172
173
174
176

177

Right Footswitch ............................................................... 177
Left Footswitch ................................................................. 177

9 Transpose and Pitch Controls

181

10 Connections

182

Accessory Jacks and Controls......................................... 182
Connection Examples — External Devices...................... 184
Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through
an External Audio System...................................... 184
Outputting the sound of an external device through
the built-in speakers of the Electone ..................... 184
Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone
............................................................................... 185
Controlling the Electone from an External Device ... 185
Connection with Computer............................................... 186
Using the [USB TO HOST] terminal ......................... 186
MIDI .................................................................................. 187
What is MIDI? ........................................................... 187
MIDI Messages of the Electone ............................... 188
MIDI Channels ......................................................... 189
MIDI Control ..................................................................... 190
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad.......................................... 192
Wireless LAN settings .............................................. 192
Wireless LAN Detailed Settings ............................... 198
Initialize the wireless LAN settings........................... 200
Glossary of Terms .................................................... 201

11 Appendix

Quick Introductory
Guide

Basic Operation

Voices

Voice Controls
and Effects

Rhythm/Keyboard
Percussion

Registration
Memory

Music Data
Recorder (MDR)

Audio

Footswitches

Transpose and
Pitch Controls

169

Recording Your Performance as Audio............................
Playing Back Audio Files..................................................
Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause ............................
Changing the Volume, Tempo and Pitch .................
Deleting the File / Changing the File Name .............

8 Footswitches

158
159
160
161
161
164
165
166
168

202

Assembly Instructions ......................................................
Troubleshooting................................................................
Specifications ...................................................................
Index.................................................................................

202
206
209
211

Connections

Appendix

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Main Features
Wide Variety of Registration Menus

page 20

The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 601 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the
Electone for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into six
basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit
your own performance needs.

Richly textured, AWM Voices, Touch functions and High Quality
Digital Effects

pages 29, 52

The ELB-02 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices—540 altogether—created with the
AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system, including special Super Articulation Voices, which
realistically recreate characteristic instrument sounds. With highly playable keyboards featuring authentic
touch response—with Initial Touch and After Touch functions—you can play these Voices with all the
expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument. What’s more, there is a wide variety of effect types
that you can apply to each Voice section—letting you enhance and even completely change the character of the
Voices.

Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment

page 68

The exceptionally wide selection of various rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your
performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) —such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and
Break—that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and
professional. Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing
basic backing as well as embellishments.

Keyboard Percussion

page 88

This powerful feature allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the keyboard. A wide range of
sounds and drum/percussion kits are available, for performing rhythms in real time. Each sound is assigned to
its own key, and the sounds include everything from conventional kicks and snares to a wide variety of ethnic
and Latin instruments, as well as special sound effects, such as thunder, laughing, animal cries and more.

Versatile Functions of the Music Data Recorder

page 127

The Electone also features a Music Data Recorder (MDR) for recording your Registrations and performances
to a USB flash drive, and playing back those performances using the sounds of the Electone. In addition, the
MDR allows you to copy a Song from one USB flash drive to another, letting you archive your important
recordings and Registration data.

Audio Recording

page 169

You can record your performances as audio data (.WAV) to a USB flash drive. Since the data is saved in stereo
WAV format of normal CD quality resolution (44.1kHz/16bit), it can be transmitted to and played on portable
music players by using a computer, allowing you to share your recordings with your friends, and make your
own CDs to enjoy as well.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals
Overview

Upper Keyboard
page 29

Music Rest
page 8

Lower Keyboard
page 29
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
page 183
MIDI terminals
page 183
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
page 183

Front Panel

[USB TO HOST] terminal
page 183

[AUX IN] jack
page 182

[AC IN] jack
For connecting a power
cord. page 16

AUX OUT [L/L+R]/
[R] jack
page 182

Right Footswitch
page 121

[PHONES] jack
page 182

Expression Pedal
page 17

Speaker

Left Footswitch
page 177

Pedalboard
page 29

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Front Panel
Panel Setup (Panel Settings)
By using the controls on the panel, you can make various settings such as selecting a Voice or Style, tuning the pitch, and so on. These settings
of the instrument are together referred to as “panel setup” or “panel settings” in this manual.

[VOICE SECTION 2]
button
Switches between Voice
sections 1 and 2 (page 33).

MUSIC DATA RECORDER (MDR)
Allows recording and playback of
your keyboard performances, and
lets you store Registration data for
future recall (page 127).

LEAD VOICE

LCD display

Selects the Lead Voices for Upper Keyboard
(page 29). Also available on the Lower
Keyboard while “To Lower” function is on.

Shows the current
settings of the
Electone (page 25).

REGISTRATION MENU

UPPER KEYBOARD
VOICE

Selects convenient Registrations,
which let you instantly reconfigure
all relevant settings, allowing you
to start playing with all appropriate
sounds pre-selected (page 20).

Selects the Voices
for Upper Keyboard
(page 29).

SUSTAIN buttons
(page 63)

REVERB buttons
(page 61)

TEMPO buttons
Adjusts the speed
of the rhythm
(page 73).

KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
Turns Keyboard
Percussion On or
Off (page 88).

C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3

RHYTHM
Sets the rhythm
(page 68).

RHYTHM CONTROL
Starts and stops the
rhythm, and adds
changes to the
rhythm (page 71).

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

D1 E1

F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3

Tempo, Bar/Beat
display

LOWER
KEYBOARD VOICE

Shows the current
tempo or position in the
measure (page 73).

Selects the Voices
for Lower Keyboard
(page 30).

PEDAL VOICE
Selects the Voices for Pedalboard
(page 30). Also available on the
Lower Keyboard while “To Lower”
function is on.

Page buttons

DATA CONTROL dial

Selects the Page
of the display
(page 26).

Selects the setting or
value in the display
(page 25).

Data Control [A] –
[D] buttons
Selects items and
changes the values/
settings in the
display (page 25).

[9-16] button

[MEMORY] button

(page 112)

(page 111)

REGISTRATION
MEMORY buttons
For registering and
recalling panel
setups (page 111).

[DISABLE] button
(page 114)

MASTER VOLUME
dial
Adjusts the overall
volume (page 17).

D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6

[USB TO DEVICE]
terminal
For connecting a
USB flash drive
(page 183).

[P] (Standby/On)
switch
Turns the
instrument’s power
on or sets it to
standby (page 16).

D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5

Display Select
[VOICE DISPLAY] button
(page 31)

[MDR] button (page 127)

[A.B.C./M.O.C.] button
(page 82)

[AUDIO] button
(page 169)

[FOOTSWITCH] button
(page 177)

[UTILITY] button
(page 27)

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Quick Introductory Guide
1 Power Supply
Connect the plugs of the power cord in the order shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Use only the supplied
power cord.

CAUTION

When setting up the
product, make sure that
the AC outlet you are using
is easily accessible. If
some trouble or
malfunction occurs,
immediately turn off the
power switch and
disconnect the plug from
the outlet.

2
[AC IN] jack
(page 13)
AC Outlet
The shape of the
plug and outlet
differs depending
on your locale.

NOTE
When disconnecting the
power cord, first turn off the
power, then follow this
procedure in reverse order.

2 Turning On/Off the Power

NOTICE
Do not press any keys or
buttons while turning the
power on. Doing so may
cause the Electone to
malfunction or data loss.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial counter-clockwise.

Press the [P] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.

This last display, Voice Display, shows you the currently assigned voice settings
for each Voice section (page 31).

Press and hold the [P] (Standby/On) switch for about a second to
turn the power off.

Quick Introductory Guide

When you turn on the Electone, the following displays will appear one after the
other on the LCD display:

CAUTION
Even when the [P]
(Standby/On) switch is in
standby status, electricity
is still flowing to the
instrument at the minimum
level. Remove the electric
plug from the outlet when
the instrument is not to be
used for extended periods
of time, or during electrical
storms.

3 Adjusting the Volume

Set the MASTER VOLUME control.
The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of
the entire instrument.

Decreases the volume

CAUTION
Do not use the instrument
for a long period of time at
a high or uncomfortable
volume level, since this
can cause permanent
hearing loss.

Increases the volume

Press the Expression pedal down with your foot.
Once you have set the MASTER VOLUME control to a suitable level, you can
use the Expression pedal to change the volume with your foot as you play.

Maximum volume

Minimum volume

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

4 Adjusting the Contrast of the Display
You can adjust the contrast of the display.
Quick Introductory Guide

NOTICE
The LCD contrast setting is
automatically saved when
another display is called
up. Make sure to switch to
another display before
turning the power off.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the Utility display.
Since the contrast setting is set in Utility display Page 1, select Page 1 with the
page buttons if another page is shown.

Press the [C] button corresponding to “LCD CONTRAST.”
“LCD CONTRAST” is selected and highlighted.

Adjust the LCD contrast with the DATA CONTROL dial or by
successively pressing the corresponding button.
You can set the value between -5 – +5.

5 Using Headphones
CAUTION

Quick Introductory Guide

To use headphones, connect them to the PHONES jack (standard stereo phone jack).

Do not use the
headphones for a long
period of time at a high or
uncomfortable volume
level, since this can cause
permanent hearing loss.

Standard stereo phone plug

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

1 Basic Operation
1 Registration Menu
NOTE
Additional basic
Registrations are preset on
the Registration Memory
locations from 1 to 16. See
page 116 for details.

The Registration Menu is a simple, highly convenient way to instantly change all the
Electone settings for playing in specific music styles. A Registration consists of panel
settings including the selected Upper Keyboard Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices,
Pedal Voices, the assigned rhythm and so on. Registration Menu button [0] includes
a variety of basic Registrations, especially for practicing, and the other buttons [1] –
[5] include Registrations in various music genres for playing your favorite types of
music. These give you a wide palette of Registrations to choose from, both for
practice purposes and for freely playing in virtually any music style or genre.

Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu


Press one of the REGISTRATION MENU buttons.
Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example,
if you want to play Jazz, press the [4] button. For details on the Registration
Menu, see page 22.

Basic

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Page 01
Page 02

Kids
Simple

Pages 01, 02

Pops & Rock

Pages 01, 02

Dance & Ballad

Pages 01, 02

Jazz & Latin

Pages 01, 02

Symphony & World

From this main category, select the specific Registration you want
to use.
Each Registration Menu button actually contains many Registrations. Select the
desired Registrations in sequence by turning the DATA CONTROL dial. You
can also select Registration by using the [A] and [D] buttons located at the
immediate right side of the LCD.

Changing Pages

1
Basic Operation

Page buttons

REGISTRATION MENU buttons [1] – [5] contain two display pages: “01” and
“02,” each of which contain two different sets of Registrations. Page 01 features the
same Registration Menu as that of the ELB-01, while Page 02 features new
Registration Menus for the ELB-02. From each of the 01 and 02 pages, select the
desired Registration.

Play your favorite song with the selected Registration.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Registration Menu List


[ 0 ] BASIC
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55

1
Basic Operation

Simple 1 St/St
Simple 2 St/Hr
Simple 3 Cl/St
Simple 4 Cl/Hr
Simple 5 Tp/St
Simple 6 Tp/Hr
Simple 7 Ob/St
Simple 8 Ob/Bsn
Simple 9 Fl/St
Simple 10 Fl/Cl
Simple 11 Cl/Cl
Simple 12 Pf/Pf
Simple 13 Cl/Bsn
Sound Effect 1
Sound Effect 2
Sound Effect 3
Sound Effect 4
Sound Effect 5
Sound Effect 6
Sound Effect 7
Sound Effect 8
Sound Effect 9
Sound Effect 10
Sound Effect 11
Sound Effect 12
Sound Effect 13
Sound Effect 14
Sound Effect 15
Sound Effect 16
StCombi 1 St/St
StCombi 2 St/Hr
StCombi 3 St/Br
StCombi 4 St/CB
StCombi 5 Oct Hi
StCombi 6 Oct Lo
StCombi 7 Soft
StCombi 8 SftOct
StCombi 9 Hard
StCombi 10HrdOct
StCombi 11 St+WW
StCombi 12 St+Br
StCombi 13 Pizz
StCombi 14 Trem
StCombi 15 Vn/Vc
StCombi 16 Vn/Pz
BrCombi 1 Tp/St
BrCombi 2 Tp/Hr
BrCombi 3 Tp/Tb
BrCombi 4 Br/Hr
BrCombi 5 Br/Br
BrCombi 6 Oct
BrCombi 7 Br/CB
BrCombi 8Br/Timp
BrCombi 9 Br+Xyl
WWCombi 1 Fl/St

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95

WWCombi 2 Fl/Cl
WWCombi 3 Fl/Hp
WWCombi 4 Ob/St
WWCombi 5 Ob/Bsn
WWCombi 6 Ob/Piz
WWCombi 7 Cl/St
WWCombi 8 Cl/Hr
WWCombi 9 Cl/Piz
WWCombi 10Sax/Pf
Woodwind Ens 1
Woodwind Ens 2
Woodwind Ens 3
Woodwind Ens 4
Woodwind Ens 5
Woodwind Ens 6
Woodwind Ens 7
Decay 1 Piano
Decay 2 Harpsi
Decay 3 E.Piano
Decay 4 Guitar
Decay 5 E.Guitar
Decay 6 Xylophne
Decay 7 Glocken
Decay 8 Harp
Hold 1 PipeOrgan
Hold 2 JazzOrgan
Hold 3 Accordion
Hold 4 Recorder
Synth 1
Synth 2
Synth 3
Synth 4
Synth 5
Comping Rock
Comping Jazz 1
Comping Jazz 2
Comping Classic1
Comping Classic2
Comping Classic3
Comping Classic4

[ 1 ] KIDS, SIMPLE
Page 01 KIDS
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

Simple 8Beat 1
Simple 8Beat 2
Light Step
Sunny Pop
Kids March 1
Kids March 2
Kids March 3
Synth Rock
SymphonicMarch 1
SymphonicMarch 2
Bluegrass
Sea Carnival
Basic Waltz
Brass Ensemble
Pure Waltz
Rococo Ensemble
Pop Cha Cha
Comical Rumba
Comical Samba
Toy Orchestra
Charleston
Winter Swing
Snow Waltz 1
Snow Waltz 2
Alpine Polka *A
Alpine Polka *B
Alpine Polka *C
Alpine Polka *D
Dream Ballad *A
Dream Ballad *B
Dream Ballad *C
Dream Ballad *D
Pops Orchestra*A
Pops Orchestra*B
Pops Orchestra*C
Pops Orchestra*D
Kids On Stage *A
Kids On Stage *B
Kids On Stage *C
Kids On Stage *D
Galaxy March *A
Galaxy March *B
Galaxy March *C
Galaxy March *D
SE *A
SE *B
SE *C
SE *D

Page 02 SIMPLE
01
02
03
04
05

SimpleReg Strs 1
SimpleReg Strs 2
SimpleReg Orch 1
SimpleReg Orch 2
SimpleReg Orch 3

06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59

SimpleReg Pops 1
SimpleReg Pops 2
SimpleReg Latin
SimpleReg Jazz 1
SimpleReg Jazz 2
SimpleReg Jazz 3
SimpleReg Organ
BrassBandMarch*A
BrassBandMarch*B
Orchestra March
6/8 MarchingBand
6/8 MarchingKids
Light Waltz
OrchestraWaltz*A
OrchestraWaltz*B
OrchestraWaltz*C
OrchestraWaltz*D
8Beat Synth Pop
8Beat Pop
Pop Shuffle
R&B Shuffle
Rock
Rock Shuffle
Rock Pop Ballad
Funk
Dance Pop
Disco Pop
R&B E.Piano Bld
R&B Piano Ballad
8Beat Ballad
8Beat OrchBallad
3/4 Pop Ballad
6/8 Pop Ballad
Big Band King *A
Big Band King *B
Big Band King *C
Big Band Swing
Jazz Session
Fusion Samba
Pop Samba
Simple BossaNova
Mambo
Rumba
Cls Organ Chapel
Cls Organ Hall
RockOrgan Ballad
R&B Rock Organ
Organ Combo
6/8 Organ Ballad
Soul Jazz Organ
Pop Organ 60s
Toy Organ
Theatre Organ NY
Nostalgic Organ

Page 01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

Dynamic 8Beat
NY Ballad
British Pop
8Beat Modern
Rock Band
Detroit Pop
Techno Pop
Sheriff Reggae
Rock & Roll
Power Rock
60s Guitar Rock
Unplugged
Motor City
Lovely Shuffle
Gospel Shuffle
Joyful Gospel
Frankly Soul
Soul
Gospel
6/8 Soul
Hit Pop
New Country
Eternal Pop
Ground Beat
Bounce Pop *A
Bounce Pop *B
Bounce Pop *C
Bounce Pop *D
Blues Jam *A
Blues Jam *B
Blues Jam *C
Blues Jam *D
EvergreenWaltz*A
EvergreenWaltz*B
EvergreenWaltz*C
EvergreenWaltz*D
16Beat Pop *A
16Beat Pop *B
16Beat Pop *C
16Beat Pop *D
Top Gear Rock *A
Top Gear Rock *B
Top Gear Rock *C
Top Gear Rock *D
Southern Pop *A
Southern Pop *B
Southern Pop *C
Southern Pop *D

Page 02
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

70s Easy Pop
BoysGuitarBallad
Soul Pop
70s Top Duo
Daydream Shuffle
Oldies Pop
EuroPop Folklore

08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67

Discotheque Rock
Slow Hand Ballad
Sweet AC Ballad
70s PrimeTime TV
Crossover Funk
Joyful Gospel #2
Gospel Groove
Worship Shuffle
Worship 16beat
Soulful Wonder
Lovely & Soulful
Danceable Funk
Bright Pop Rock
AmericanHardRock
Power Rock 80s
USA RockStandard
Seaside Rock
70s Folk Rock
Alternative Rock
Alternative6/8Rk
Highway Rock
Funky Rock&Roll
Synth Pop Rock
Power Synth Rock
RockGuitarBallad
Pop Rock & Roll
Back To The 60s
Dancing Boogie
6/8 Shuffle Rock
Shuffle BoysRock
Shuffle Pop Rock
Shfl Rock Ballad
Pop Rock Band
Shuffle PopPiano
Contemp Country
Smooth Country
Xmas Shuffle
Snowy Christmas
Pretty Rock
Ultra Rock
Rock Graffiti
Casual Rock
Rookie Rock
Happy Rock
J-Pop Idol Rock
J-Pop Band Rock
Spirit Pop
Sweet Love Pop
Summer Pop
Shaky Dance
J-Pop Piano Band
J-Pop Boys
J-PopShuffleBeat
J-Pop BandBallad
Breezy Ballad
HeroRanger Theme
Sunset Pop
Funky Punch *A
Funky Punch *B
GlxyBattleship*A

68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76

GlxyBattleship*B
J-Pop Anime *A
J-Pop Anime *B
70s Honey
70s Hero
DBZ *A
DBZ *B
DBZ *C
DBZ *D

[ 3 ] DANCE&BALLAD
Page 01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44

Organ Ballad
Dramatic Ballad
Love Ballad
Smooth Lead
Pop Ballad
Guitar Ballad
Acoustic Ballad
Healing Guitar
Chillout
Sweetheart 1
Sweetheart 2
Slow & Easy
Euro Trance
6/8 Trance
Cool Hip Hop
Latin House
Dance Beat
Euro Dance Pop
UK Pop
Jive
Disco Queen
Disco Soul
Pop Disco
Hot Disco
Ibiza *A
Ibiza *B
Ibiza *C
Ibiza *D
Power House *A
Power House *B
Power House *C
Power House *D
Dance Latino *A
Dance Latino *B
Dance Latino *C
Dance Latino *D
Twilight Disco*A
Twilight Disco*B
Twilight Disco*C
Twilight Disco*D
Love Song *A
Love Song *B
Love Song *C
Love Song *D

45
46
47
48

Movie Ballad *A
Movie Ballad *B
Movie Ballad *C
Movie Ballad *D

Page 02
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52

R&B Pop Ballad
R&B Soul Ballad
R&B Cool Ballad
Cool AC
Sweet Chart Hits
Sweet SlowBallad
YourPiano Ballad
Sweet EP Ballad
J-Pop EasyBallad
Sweet Sax Ballad
Sweet R&B Ballad
Lovers R&B
Sentimental Bld
Tears Ballad
Glory Ballad
Unplugged Ballad
SentimentalMovie
BeautyCinema Bld
CinemaSympho Bld
Enka Ballad
6/8 Enka Shuffle
Christmas Ballad
Disco Hits 70s
70s Disco Night
Euro Pop Disco
Synth Disco
Ballroom Disco
Syn DancePop 80s
Dirty Dance Beat
Fortune Disco
Girls Pop 48 *A
Girls Pop 48 *B
Shiny Girls Pop
Share The Peace
DanceAndRhythm*A
DanceAndRhythm*B
DanceAndRhythm*C
DanceAndRhythm*D
Girls Techno
Candy Pop Techno
Dancing Platform
Dance Beat EX.
Club Beat
Electronica Beat
Kool Garage
Electronic Dance
New Age Chillout
Eurobeat Party
Ibiza Trance
Casual Trance
Trance Party
WonderTranceShfl

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

1
Basic Operation

[ 2 ] POPS&ROCK

[ 4 ] JAZZ&LATIN
Page 01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

1
Basic Operation

Blow On Sax
Sax Ensemble
Moonlight
Big Band
Clarinet Swing
Jazz Combo
Medium Jazz
Organ Session
Guitar Combo
Tender Ballad
Jazz Waltz
Five-Four
Big Band Samba
Mambo Brass
Mambo Tenor
Montuno
Bossa Nova
Pop Bossa
Sweet Rumba
Beguine
Cha Cha Cha
Mellow Groove
Modern R&B
Dixieland Jazz
Jungle Drum *A
Jungle Drum *B
Jungle Drum *C
Jungle Drum *D
Jazz Club *A
Jazz Club *B
Jazz Club *C
Jazz Club *D
Afro Session *A
Afro Session *B
Afro Session *C
Afro Session *D
ChaCha Grandee*A
ChaCha Grandee*B
ChaCha Grandee*C
ChaCha Grandee*D
3/4 Fast Jazz *A
3/4 Fast Jazz *B
3/4 Fast Jazz *C
3/4 Fast Jazz *D
Twilight Sax *A
Twilight Sax *B
Twilight Sax *C
Twilight Sax *D

Page 02
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

Big Band Tutti
Alto Sax Combo
Jazz Combo Fast
Jazz Combo 66
The Big Band *A
The Big Band *B
Guitar JazzCombo

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

The Swing Jazz
New Orleans Jazz
Ragtime Band
Funky Cat Groove
Afro Cuban Jazz
Guitar JazzWaltz
Sax Jazz Waltz
Swing Steps
Swing Chorus
Relax Swing
Urban Lounge
Broadway Tap
Brazilian Bossa
Lounge BossaNova
8Beat Bossa Nova
Pop Bossa Nova
Tiny Bossa Nova
Cafe Samba
BitterSweetLatin
Latin Rock
DanceBeatLatin*A
DanceBeatLatin*B
Pop Accordion
Sweet Bomba
Orquesta Salsa
New Flamenco
Jummin' Reggae
RumbaAndTheCity
French Caribbean
Caribbean Sea

[ 5 ] SYMPHONY&WORLD
Page 01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Fanfare
String Orchestra
Romantic Violin
Baroque
Flute & Harp
Serenade
Fast March
Wild West
Vienna Waltz
Polka
Chanson Club
Theatre Organ
Flamenco
Pop Flamenco
Mexican Dance
Mariachi
Celtic Dance
Folk Step
Italiano
Musette
Country
Hawaiian
Chinese Nocturne

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

Japanese Sound
OrchestraMarch*A
OrchestraMarch*B
OrchestraMarch*C
OrchestraMarch*D
Pasodoble *A
Pasodoble *B
Pasodoble *C
Pasodoble *D
Tango *A
Tango *B
Tango *C
Tango *D
Show Time *A
Show Time *B
Show Time *C
Show Time *D
Majestic Sound*A
Majestic Sound*B
Majestic Sound*C
Majestic Sound*D
OrchestraSwing*A
OrchestraSwing*B
OrchestraSwing*C
OrchestraSwing*D

Page 02
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

Orch Full Unit
String Classic
Sweet Pizzicato
Baroque Symphony
Nostalgic Green
New Year March
Wind Orchestra
BrassBand Parade
Choral No.9
Angel Voices
Beat Classic
Can Can Pop
Elegant Waltz
Chorus Waltz
Love Waltz
Fantasy World
Movie Pirates
Chorus Symphony
Hollywood Sound
Super Showtune
TV DramaTrack *A
TV DramaTrack *B
Movie Symphonic
Movie Soundtrack
Yoo-Hoo Polka
Pop Polka
Funny Polka
Casual Polka
Country Town
Tango Band
Turkish Pops
Oriental Dance
Celtic Beat
Celtic Waltz

35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42

Trad Irish Pipe
Irish Ballad
ChinaSweetBallad
ChinaRomanticBld
China Dance Beat
China Kung Fu
China Trad Song
China Trad Dance

2 Using the LCD display
Many of the Electone’s operations are done from the LCD display. Pressing a button
on the panel automatically calls up the relevant function for the corresponding
button in the display. Depending on the display that appears, you can conveniently
perform various functions and change values/settings by using the [A] – [D] buttons
(located at the immediate right side of the LCD) and the DATA CONTROL dial (at
the right of the [A] – [D] buttons).

Basic Operation

Selecting from a list in the display


Scroll bar

In general (for example, for Voices and Rhythms), there are too many selectable
items and menus to all be shown in the display. In such a list display, scroll bar will
be shown at the right side of the display. When the scroll bar is shown in the display,
you can scroll through the display vertically by rotating the DATA CONTROL dial
and select the desired menu.
When the marks [U] and [D] are shown at the right side of the scroll bar in the
display, you can scroll the display and select the desired one by using the [A] or [D]
buttons.

Selecting an item and changing its value


1. Select the item

2. Change the value/setting

In many displays (other than lists), items or parameters, such as Volume and Reverb,
are shown in vertical order, with the corresponding values/settings at the immediate
right of the items. In this type of display, you can select (highlight) the item by
pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] button (in the example above, the [B] button,
which corresponding to the Reverb setting), letting you change the value/setting
with the DATA CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the corresponding
button (in this case, the [B] button).
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Changing the Display Page

Page buttons
Display name

Page

Basic Operation
Shows the number of pages and the current
page. The current page is shown with a long
bar (_), while other available pages are shown
as dots (.).
Page 1

Page 2

Page 3

Page buttons are used to select the various ‘pages’ of the display (when available),
with the currently selected page number appearing at the top right of the LCD. Use
the [R] button to select the next page, and [L] to select the previous page.
Simultaneously pressing both buttons selects Page 1.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

3 Basic Operation
Selecting the Display Language


Basic Operation

The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default
setting is English.

Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel.
The Utility display appears. Since the language is set in Utility display Page 1,
select Page 1 with the page buttons if another page is shown.

Press the [A] button to select the corresponding language then
successively press the same button to switch the value between
Japanese and English.

NOTICE
The language setting is
automatically saved when
another display is called
up. Make sure to switch to
another display before
turning the power off.

Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)


All current settings including Registration Memory (in all banks), Display language
and display contrast settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure. Be
careful when executing Factory Set, since it erases all your existing data. Always save
your important data to a USB flash drive.
Note that the operation here does not affect the settings of the wireless LAN settings,
which can be initialized on page 200.

Reference Page
Saving the Registration Data
to USB Flash Drive
(page 118)

Reference Page
Initializing Registration
Memory (page 120)

Turn off the power.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back
on.

1
Basic Operation

Release the ENDING [1] button after the Voice Display appears.

Confirming the Version of Your Electone


You can confirm the version of your Electone by the following procedure.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears.

Select Page 8 by using the Page buttons.
The Version appears in the display.

2 Voices
This Electone features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on the
Upper Keyboard, Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are available on the
Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard each
have two Voice sections.

Voices for the Upper
Keyboard

Voices for
Pedalboard

Voices for the Lower
Keyboard

1 Voices for Each Keyboard
Voices for the Upper Keyboard

Reference Page

Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing
together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 1, and Lead
Voice 2. Upper Keyboard Voice 1 and Upper Keyboard Voice 2 can be selected from
the panel’s “UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2” section, while the Lead Voice 1 and
Lead Voice 2 can be selected from the “LEAD VOICE 1/2” section.
Voices for the Upper Keyboard 1 and Upper
Keyboard 2

• Switching between Voice
section 1 and Voice section
2 (page 36)
• User buttons (page 39)
• [TO LOWERD/SOLO]
button (pages 38, 39)

Voices for the Lead Voice 1
and Lead Voice 2

The Lead Voice sounds only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more
keys are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for solo instruments such
as Trumpet and Saxophone—instruments that play the “leading” or most prominent
part in an orchestra or band.
As the default, only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 sounds when you play the Upper
Keyboard.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Voices for the Lower Keyboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing
together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each
section can be selected from the panel’s “LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2” section.
Voices for the Lower Keyboard 1 and Lower Keyboard 2

2
Voices

Reference Page
[TO LOWERU] button
(page 38)

Voices for Pedalboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing
together: Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected
from the panel’s “PEDAL VOICE 1/2” section. The Pedal Voice sounds one note at a
time; when you simultaneously press two or more keys, only the highest note will
sound.
Voices for the Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

2 Voice Display
The Voice Display allows you to easily check which Voices are being used for each
keyboard. It also allows you to set whether the Voice for each section sounds or not
by changing the On/Off status in the display.

How to call up the Voice Display:

2
Voices

Pressing the [VOICE DISPLAY] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section selects the
Voice Display. (The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is turned on.)

The Voice Display consists of three different pages that can be switched by pressing
the Page buttons at the top right of the display.
The Voice Display shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice section and
their On/Off status.
Voice Display [Page 1]

Voice name

Voice Display [Page 2]

On/Off status

Voice name

On/Off status

On/Off status of the Voices
You can set whether the Voice sounds or not by setting the on/off status in the Voice
display. Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the Voice section you want to
change to alternate between on and off.
Page 1 and page 2
Each of the keyboards and Pedalboard have two basic Voice sections: Voice section 1
and Voice section 2. To select a Voice, you need to first select the desired Voice
section. For this reason, the Voice Display actually has two separate displays: one for
checking the Voice selected in Voice section 1, and the other for Voice section 2.
Successive presses of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button at the top left on the panel
switch between the Voice sections, and the corresponding display will be shown.

Reference Page
Switching between Voice
section 1 and Voice section
2 (page 36)

NOTE
Selecting Page 1 or 2 turns
the [VOICE SECTION 2]
button off or on.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

When Voice section 1 is selected
([VOICE SECTION 2] button is off)

Upper Keyboard Voice 1
Lead Voice 1
Lower Keyboard Voice 1
Pedal Voice 1

2
Voices

From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 1
on each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Lead Voice 1, Lower Keyboard Voice 1
and Pedal Voice 1).
When Voice section 2 is selected
([VOICE SECTION 2] button lights up)

Upper Keyboard Voice 2
Lead Voice 2
Lower Keyboard Voice 2
Pedal Voice 2

From this display, you can check which Voices have been selected for Voice section 2
on each keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2
and Pedal Voice 2).

Voice Display [Page 3]

Reference Page
Registration Memory
(page 111)

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

For selecting the desired Bank to which you can store the Registration, or from
which you can recall the Registration. For details, refer to page 116.

3 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons
Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections,
instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 of the Voice section 1 are given
here. For details on how to select a Voice of Voice section 2, see page 37.

Selecting Voices for Voice section 1


Make sure that the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is off.
If the [VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is lit, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button
to turn the lamp off, and select Voice section 1.

Reference Page
Switching between Voice
section 1 and Voice section
2 (page 36)

Voices

Lamp is off, indicating that you can select
a Voice for Voice section 1.

When the [VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is off, you can select a Voice for Voice
section 1 (in this case, the Upper Keyboard Voice 1), from the panel’s UPPER
KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 section.

Press one of the Voice buttons in the UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/
2 section.
For example, if you have pressed the [ORGAN] button, the following display
(Voice Menu) will appear.

The Voice menu contains many Organ Voices, and they will be shown in the
display.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Select the Voice in the Voice menu display by rotating the DATA
CONTROL dial.
You can also select by pressing the [A]/[D] buttons.

Voices

Now go on to select voices for the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard as you did for the
Upper keyboard above.

Adjusting the Voice volume


There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the Volume buttons on the panel
and setting the volume in the display. The Volume buttons let you make coarse
adjustments to the volume while the setting in the display gives you fine control.

Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse)
Press one of the Volume buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired
level for each Voice. The controls have five volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or
no sound, to a maximum of full volume.
Increasing the volume

Decreasing the volume

NOTE
Depending on the volume
value (set in the Voice
Condition display), two
adjacent Volume button
lamps may be lit at the same
time, indicating an
intermediate position.

NOTE
Although setting the on/off
status of the Voice section to
off in the Voice Display
results in a Volume value of 0
in the Voice Condition
display, it will change to on
when you increase the
Volume value in the Voice
Condition display or by
using the panel Volume
buttons, even if you have set
it to off.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Setting the Volume in the display (fine)
Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again after selecting the Voice calls up
the Voice Condition display.
The Volume is displayed in the top of the Voice Condition display Page 1. Press the
[A] button to select the “VOLUME” item, then adjust the volume by using the DATA
CONTROL dial. The range of the Fine volume control is 0 – 24.
Voice Condition Display [Page 1]

Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display for the selected button.
Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive presses
alternate between the two displays.

Voice Menu Display

Voices

2
Voice Condition Display

From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as Pan,
Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition display, see
page 53.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

4 Selecting a Voice for Voice section 2
This feature lets you blend two Voices together—Voice section 1 with a different
Voice in Voice section 2. This is useful for creating rich textures in the sound,
playing the two Voices in a layer. For details on how to select a Voice for Voice
section 1, see page 33. The instructions below explain how to selecting a Voice
(Upper Keyboard Voice 2) for Voice section 2.

Switching between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2


Voices

NOTE
Switching between Voice
sections 1 and 2 has no
effect on which Voice is
sounded by the keyboard.

To switch between Voice section 1 and Voice section 2, press the [VOICE SECTION
2] button on the panel.
For the Voice section which is indicated as “1/2” on the panel, you can select the
Voice from each section by switching between sections 1 and 2 by pressing the
[VOICE SECTION 2] button.

Each press of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button alternates between the available Voice
sections 1 and 2. When the button lamp is off, Voice section 1 is available. When the
button lamp is lit, Voice section 2 is available.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Section 1

Voice Section 2

([VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is off)

([VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is lit)

Since Voice section 1 is selected, you
can select the Upper Keyboard Voice
1, Lead Voice 1, Lower Keyboard
Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 1.

Since Voice section 2 is selected, you
can select the Upper Keyboard Voice
2, Lead Voice 2, Lower Keyboard
Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2.

Upper Keyboard
Voice 1

Lead
Voice 1

Upper Keyboard
Voice 2

Lead
Voice 2

Lower Keyboard
Voice 1

Pedal
Voice 1

Lower Keyboard
Voice 2

Pedal
Voice 2

Selecting Voices for Voice Section 2


Since selection of Voices for Voice section 2 follows the same procedure throughout
all Keyboard sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard, Upper Keyboard
Voice 2, are given here.

Make sure that the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is lit.
If the [VOICE SECTION 2] lamp is off, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button
to turn the lamp on, and select Voice section 2.

2
Voices

Lamp is lit, indicating that you can select
a Voice for Voice section 2.

Now, you can select a Voice for Upper Keyboard Voice 2 from the panel’s
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1/2 section.

Press one of the Voice buttons in the UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE
1/2 section.

Indicates Upper Keyboard
Voice 2 is selected.

Select the Voice you want to play by using the DATA CONTROL
dial.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Press one of the Volume buttons of the UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE
1/2 section on the panel to increase the Volume level for the Upper
Keyboard Voice 2.

2
Voices

Since the default Volume level for Voice section 2 is set to minimum, the Upper
Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2
will produce no sound even after you select the Voices for Voice section 2. To
play the Voices for Voice section 2, make sure to press the Volume buttons of
the selected Voice 1/2 section on the panel to increase the Volume level. When
the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is lit, the Volume buttons of the
Voice sections can be used to set the Volume level specifically for Voice section
2.
Now set the Voices for Lead Voice 2, Lower keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 as you
did for Upper keyboard Voice 2 above.

Reference Page
On/Off status of the Voices
(page 31)

If you want to turn off the Voices of Voice section 2, set the volume level to
minimum by using the Volume buttons of the selected Voice sections on the panel
while the lamp of the [VOICE SECTION 2] button is lit, or set the status to Off in the
Voice Display [Page 2].

NOTE
Even when the To Lower
function is on, the Pedal
Voices 1, 2 played on the
Lower Keyboard will be
controlled by the Sustain
settings for the Pedal Voices.
(page 63)

About the To Lower function
Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also be
played on the Lower Keyboard when the TO LOWER button in each section is on.

NOTE
Even when the To Lower
function is on, the Pedal
Voices 1, 2 played on the
Lower Keyboard will sound
monophonic.

The To Lower function is not available in the Lead Voice 2 section.
When this function is on, the Lead Voice 1 and Pedal Voice cannot be played on the
Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

NOTE

About the Solo function

The [TO LOWERD/SOLO]
button functions as Solo
when the [VOICE SECTION
2] button lights up, and
function as TO LOWER when
the [VOICE SECTION 2] is
off.

2
Voices

The ELS series Electone features an exclusive Solo function letting you instantly switch to
a solo Lead Voice in the middle of your performance, muting all other Upper Keyboard
Voices. This Electone can playback Songs containing the Solo function by using the
MDR function. After playing back such a Song, [TO LOWERD/SOLO] button may
light. In this status, Lead Voice 2 will not sound, so turn off the [TO LOWERD/SOLO]
button.

5 Selecting Voices from the User buttons
This Electone has a variety of Voices from which you can choose—greater than what
is immediately apparent from the front panel controls. You’ve already learned (in
“Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons” above) how to select different Voices that
are available in the Voice Menu display of each panel voice.
The Electone also has User buttons in each voice section, giving you access to even
more voices. These User buttons function as ‘wild card’ Voice Menu selectors; any
internal voices can be selected from these buttons.

NOTE
The Voices S-Violin, S-Flute,
S-Alto Sax and S-Irish Pipe
can be used only for Voice
sections Lead Voices 1/2
and Pedal Voices 1/2. These
four Voices cannot be
selected for Voice sections
Upper Keyboard Voices 1/2
and Lower Keyboard Voices
1/2, and are not shown in the
display.

User buttons

The User buttons have two basic uses:
 For playing any Voice of the Voice Menus from any of the keyboards or Pedalboard. You
can play on the Upper Keyboard, for example, Voices from any of the other Voice Menu
pages, and not be limited to only the twelve buttons (twelve Voice Menu pages) that make
up the Upper Voice section.
 For having two different Voices from the same Voice Menu page available for selection in
the same song. For example, you can assign one of the Voices to a User button in the Upper
Keyboard Voice 1/2 section, the second Voice to the other User button in the same section.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

For example, select Pedal Voice “5: Contrabass 5” for User button [1] in Upper
Keyboard Voice 1.

Make sure that the lamp of [Voice section 2] is off.
If the [Voice section 2] lamp is lit, press the [VOICE SECTION 2] button to
turn the lamp off, and select Voice section 1.

Lamp is off, indicating that you can
select a Voice for Voice section 1.

2
Voices

Press one of the User buttons in any of the Voice sections (in this
case, User button [1] in Upper Keyboard Voice 1 section).
The name of the selected category is displayed.

Voice category

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Select one of the Pages (categories) with the Page buttons (in this
case, “CONTRABASS”).

Directly selecting the category
To directly select the desired category, hold down one of the User buttons and
simultaneously press the desired Voice button.

1. While holding down the User button...

Voices

2. Press the Voice button.

Select “5: CONTRABASS 5” by using the DATA CONTROL dial.

Now you’ve assigned Contrabass 5 to be called up by User button [1] in Upper
Keyboard Voice 1. You can set voices to the User buttons in any other Voice sections
just as you did for Upper keyboard Voice 1 above.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

6 Voice List
This list describes the preset Voices.
• Super Articulation Voices
Voices having the prefix “S-” at the beginning of the name. For details on the effects that are produced by
playing the Super Articulation Voices, refer to the Description column.
“AEM” is the trademark of Yamaha’s leading-edge tone generation technology.

2
Voices

• Auto Articulation Voices
Voices which produce effects by playing the keyboard when setting AUTO ARTICULATION
(page 59) to ON in page 6 of the Voice Condition display. For details on the effects that are produced by
playing the Auto Articulation Voices, refer to the Description column.
Portamento or glissando effect will be produced only when you play intervals of minor 7th, Major 7th or
octave in legato with the Voice “S-Violin” or “S-Alto Sax.”
Category
STRINGS/
VIOLIN

No.

Voice Name

Description

Strings 1

These Voices feature string ensemble sounds, with accurate simulation of all string instruments,
including contrabass, cello, viola and violin. Variations include light plucking sounds, bow scratching
noises and deep resonant sounds.

Strings 2

Strings 3

Strings 4

Strings 5

Strings 6

Strings 7

Strings 8

Strings 9

Strings 10

Strings 11

Slow Strings

This string sound features a gentle initial attack.

Chamber Strs 1

These string ensembles are for chamber music.

Chamber Strs 2

Chamber Strs 3

Chamber Strs 4

Pizzicato Strs 1

Pizzicato Strs 2

Pizzicato Strs 3

These are sounds of stringed instruments being plucked by finger instead of being bowed.

Pizzicato Strs 4

Tremolo Strings

This is the sound of tremolo strings on a single note.

Spiccato Strings

This is the sound of lightly bouncing a bow on the strings of a stringed instrument.

Strings1 & 6

This is a combination of Strings 1 and Strings 6.

Strings2 & Viola

This is a combination of Strings 2 and Viola.

Strings3 & 4

This is a combination of Strings 3 and Strings 4.

Strings6&Violin4

This is a combination of Strings 6 and Violin 4.

Violin4 & Cello

This is a combination of Violin 4 and Cello.

Octave Strings 1

These are string ensemble sounds played in octaves.

Octave Strings 2

Octave Strings 3

Violin 1

Violin 2

Violin 3

Violin 4

Violin 5

Violin 6

Pizzicato Violin

Viola

This instrument is slightly larger (and deeper) than a violin. It is used for mid-range parts.

Cello 1

These are warm and deep sounds.

Cello 2

S-Violin

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

These deeply expressive sounds are suitable not only for classical music but, also jazz and country &
western. Tonal variations include bright Voices and soft ones.

This is the sound of a violin being plucked by finger.

*1
*2

This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology for an accurate simulation of legato and release
sounds. Natural-sounding portamento is possible by turning Auto Articulation on and playing legato
octaves.

Category

No.

CONTRABASS

Contrabass 1

Contrabass 2

Contrabass 3

Contrabass 4

Contrabass 5

Contrabass 6

Pizzicato Bass 1

Pizzicato Bass 2

Acoustic Bass 1

Acoustic Bass 2

These acoustic bass sounds are ideal for jazz. This instrument is also known as “standup bass” and
“upright bass.”

Description
These sounds are used for the lowest pitched parts. Variations range from deep to solo-type sounds.

These are the sounds of contrabass being plucked by finger.

Bass & Cymbal

This is a combination of acoustic bass and ride cymbal.

Brass Section 1

Brass Section 2

These are trumpet-based brass section sounds. Variations include sounds for classical, big band and
other music.

Brass Section 3

Brass Section 4

Brass Section 5

Brass Section 6

Power Brass

This is a crisp and powerful brass section sound.

Soft Brass

This is a soft and sustained brass section sound.

Trombone Sec 1

Trombone Sec 2

These are trombone brass section sounds. Variations include a deep sound for classical music and a
sweet, smooth sound for jazz ballads.

Trombone Sec 3

Trombone Sec 4

Trombone Sec 5

Trombone Sec 6

Brass1&Trumpet6

This is a combination of Brass Section 1 and Trumpet 6.

Brass2&Trumpet6

This is a combination of Brass Section 2 and Trumpet 6.

Horn 1 & 3

This is a combination of Horn 1 and Horn 3.

Octave Brass 1

Octave Brass 2

These are octave brass sounds with variations. They feature rich variations from strong, dynamic impact
Voices with quick attack, to soft, warm Voices for enriching the overall sound.

Octave Brass 3

Octave Brass 4

Octave Brass 5

Octave Brass 6

Octave Brass 7

Octave Brass 8

Trumpet 1

Trumpet 2

Trumpet 3

Trumpet 4

Trumpet 5

Trumpet 6

Trumpet 7

Trumpet 8

Trumpet 9

Muted Trumpet 1

Muted Trumpet 2

Muted Trumpet 3

Muted Trumpet 4

Flugel Horn 1

Flugel Horn 2

Trombone 1

Trombone 2

Trombone 3

Muted Trombone 1

Muted Trombone 2

Horn 1

Horn 2

Horn 3

Horn 4

Horn 5

Horn 6

Muted Horn

2
Voices

BRASS/
TRUMPET

Voice Name

These are bright, multi-purpose trumpet sounds.

These sounds recreate the distinctive tone that results when a mute is inserted in the bell of trumpet. The
normal “blasting” sound of the trumpet is suppressed, and the resulting sound is thin and metallic.

This is a brass instrument with a characteristically warm and soft sound.
The slide trombone has distinctive “stretching” and “shrinking” characteristics and features a wide range
of expressive power, from brilliant and strong to soft and sweet.

A mute effect makes the volume softer and alters the characteristics of this trombone Voice.
These Voices are all recreations of horns with coiled tubing, and feature a soft, mellow sound. The
Voices are indispensable for orchestra and brass band since they blend well with virtually any
instrument sound, woodwind or brass.

This horn has a sound that is made sharp and metallic by using a mute, and is even capable of
mimicking the sound of a human Voice.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Category
BRASS/
TRUMPET

WOODWIND/
FLUTE

2
Voices
TUTTI

No.

Voice Name

Description

Tuba 1

This instrument is meant to be played in the lower octaves and has a rich, stable sound that supports
brass band and orchestra. It has a wide expressive range, and is often used in playing humorous
phrases.

Tuba 2

Euphonium

This instrument features a characteristically broad and deep — even noble — sound, and is frequently
used as a solo instrument.

Brass Bass 1

These are brass ensembles for playing in the lower octaves. They also have a timpani sound in unison.

Brass Bass 2

Brass Bass 3

Flute 1

Flute 2

Flute 3

Flute 4

Flute 5

Piccolo

This instrument is one octave higher than flute and is meant to be played in the higher octaves.

Recorder 1

Recorder 2

This basic flute instrument is used in grade school music classes, and can be heard in some medieval
and baroque music. It has a relatively hard and round sound.

Ocarina

This instrument has a long history and features a simple, warm sound. The pitch and the sound quality
are changed by the strength of the breath.

Whistle

This sound is a reproduction of a human whistling.

Clarinet 1

Clarinet 2

Clarinet 3

This instrument has a wide sound range and distinctive character — with rich sound in the low end and
crisp, bright tones in the high. It is used extensively in a variety of music styles including classical
chamber music and swing jazz.

Clarinet 4

Bass Clarinet

This instrument has a thick, deep sound and is played one octave lower than the normal clarinet.

Oboe 1

Oboe 2

An instrument of the woodwind double reed family, this has a high, reedy, sometimes nasal tone — yet it
is also rich and warm, and can handle a wide range of expression and emotion.

Oboe 3

English Horn

Also known as “cor anglais,” this instrument is larger than the oboe, and its timbre is well-suited for the
performance of expressive, melancholic solos in slow orchestral pieces.

Bassoon 1

Bassoon 2

Bassoon 3

This instrument belongs to the double reed family and is used in the lower range. It is known for its
humorous, expressive character as well as its wide range and agility, and can also be used as a solo
instrument.

Alto Sax 1

Alto Sax 2

This light and transparent instrument Voice sounds like a bird singing. This instrument is equally good
for both fast, quickly executed passages and smooth melodies.

Among the woodwind instruments, this instrument is capable of the loudest sound, and plays a highly
prominent role. Its wide expressive power makes it ideal for both classical music and jazz.

Tenor Sax 1

Tenor Sax 2

Tenor Sax 3

Soprano Sax

Baritone Sax

This is a soft and low baritone sax sound, also used in R&B music.

Sax Ensemble 1

Sax Ensemble 2

These are saxophone ensemble sounds with variations, such as mellow sounds for classical music and
a sax section for big band.

Sax Ensemble 3

Sax Ensemble 4

Sax Ensemble 5

Sax Ensemble 6

Woodwind Ens 1

Woodwind Ens 2

Woodwind Ens 3

This instrument is active in a wide range of genres, including classical and jazz. It is often used in soul
and R&B music, or in slow, moody pieces.

This instrument features a characteristic high, “stretching” sound, perfect for legato phrasing and sweet,
emotional passages.

These are woodwind ensemble sounds that change the instrument depending on the particular register
played.

Woodwind Ens 4

Clarinet&Flutes

This is a clarinet and flute ensemble.

Clarinet & Oboe

This is a clarinet and oboe ensemble.

Flutes & Oboes

This is a flute and oboe ensemble.

Woodwind&Glocken

S-Flute

*1
*2

This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology for an accurate simulation of legato and release
sounds.

S-Alto Sax

*1
*2

This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology for an accurate simulation of legato and release
sounds. Natural-sounding glissando is possible by turning Auto Articulation on and playing legato
octaves.

This is a combination of woodwind ensemble and glockenspiel.

Strings & Winds

This is a strings and woodwind ensemble.

Strings&Brass 1

This is a strings and brass section ensemble.

Strings&Brass 2

Strings&Brass 3

Strings & Horn

Trumpets & Winds

This is a trumpet, brass section, and woodwind ensemble.

Horns & Winds

This is a horn and woodwind ensemble.

Orchestra Bass

This is a tuba, contrabass, and timpani ensemble.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

This is a strings and horn ensemble.

CHOIR

PAD

No.

Voice Name

Brass & Sax 1

Brass & Sax 2

Brass & Sax 3

Description
This is a brass section and sax ensemble.

Brass & Winds

This is a brass section and woodwind ensemble.

Orchestra Hit 1

Orchestra Hit 2

These are popular, widely used sampled sounds in which the many instruments of the orchestra play
together on one chord or note. They are used for dramatic hits and accents.

Choir 1

These are vocal chorus sounds. Variations include a male “ooh” sound, female “ahh,” and mixed choirs.

Choir 2

Choir 3

Choir 4

Choir 5

Choir 6

Choir 7

Choir 8

Choir 9

Vocal

This is a solo human Voice singing “ahh.”

Gospel Choir

This is a vocal chorus sound singing “whoo.”

Pop Vocals Bee

Pop Vocals Daa

These Voices include “bee,” “daa,” and “mmh” sounds that are divided between male and female
Voices based on range.

Pop Vocals Mmh

Smooth Pad 1

Smooth Pad 2

Smooth Pad 3

Smooth Pad 4

Smooth Pad 5

Smooth Pad 6

Smooth Pad 7

Resonance Pad 1

Resonance Pad 2

Resonance Pad 3

Resonance Pad 4

Resonance Pad 5

Resonance Pad 6

Resonance Pad 7

Resonance Pad 8

Bell Pad 1

Bell Pad 2

Bell Pad 3

Bell Pad 4

Bell Pad 5

Bell Pad 6

Bell Pad 7

Bell Pad 8

Voices

Category
TUTTI

These continuous, sustained synth sounds feature a smooth, warm character that help support the other
Voices in a passage, and often serve as transition sounds.

These Voices have more of unique character and distinctiveness than the other synth pads, and feature
sweeping filter effects and other dynamic sound variations when held.

These continuous pad Voices feature gentle, bell sounds. There are several types of Voices here —
including an initial bell sound, as well as a bright bell that pulses softly and continuously.

Bell Pad 9

Space Pad 1

Space Pad 2

Space Pad 3

Space Pad 4

Space Pad 5

Space Pad 6

Space Pad 7

Bright Pad

This pad features a bright unison sound.

Noisy Pad 1

This pad features a bright, buzzy sound.

Noisy Pad 2

Noisy Pad 3

This pad features a mysterious, spacey sound.

Noisy Pad 4

Warm Pad

This pad features a wide, spatial sound.

Dark Pad

This pad features a calm, “floating” attack.

Sweep Pad 1

This pad features sounds that change over time.

Sweep Pad 2

Sweep Pad 3

Sweep Phase

This pad features sounds that are processed with a phaser and that change over time.

Sweep Flanger 1

This pad features sounds that are processed with a flanger and that change over time.

Sweep Flanger 2

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Category
SYNTH

2
Voices

No.

Voice Name

Description

Synth Lead 1

These special synth sounds are designed for solo parts and lead lines. Included is a synth Voice that
has a strong layered fourth interval below the main pitch.

Synth Lead 2

Synth Lead 3

Synth Lead 4

Synth Lead 5

Synth Lead 6

Synth Lead 7

Fat Saw Lead 1

Fat Saw Lead 2

Fat Saw Lead 3

Filter Lead

This synth lead sound features an attack that simulates an analog synthesizer, with a strong touch
response.

Soft Lead 1

These synth lead sounds simulate an analog synthesizer with a soft tone.

Soft Lead 2

Soft Lead 3

Soft Lead 4

These are fat and bright synth lead sounds.

Chorus Saw Lead

This is a bright synth lead sound processed with chorus.

Vintage Lead 1

These strong synth lead sounds simulate a popular analog synthesizer.

Vintage Lead 2

Vintage Lead 3

Vintage Lead 4

Dance Chords 1

Dance Chords 2

Dance Chords 3

Club Lead 1

Club Lead 2

Pop Lead 1

Pop Lead 2

Pop Lead 3

Pop Lead 4

Pop Lead 5

Pop Lead 6

Synth Cla 1

Synth Cla 2

Synth Cla 3

Synth Cla 4

Synth Cla 5

Synth Cla 6

Synth Cla 7

Synth Sax

This is a wind synth sound.

Synth Trumpet

This is a bright analog synth sound with tension.

Synth Brass 1

Synth Brass 2

This is an abundant variety of synth brass Voices, from conventional sounds and octave unisons to
unique, comical sounds.

Synth Brass 3

Synth Brass 4

Synth Brass 5

Synth Brass 6

Synth Brass 7

Synth Brass 8

Synth Brass 9

Synth Brass 10

Synth Brass 11

Fat Synth Brass

This is a fat synth brass sound.

DetunedSawBrass1

These are powerful, detuned synth brass sounds.

DetunedSawBrass2

DetunedSawBrass3

Soft Synth Brass

This is a soft synth brass sound.

PWM Brass Slow

This is a synth brass sound that features tonal changes that are controlled by aftertouch. (PWM = Pulse
Width Modulation)

PWM Brass Fast

This is a synth brass sound with fast tonal changes. (PWM = Pulse Width Modulation)

Funky Analog

This is a synth brass sound that features a characteristic initial attack.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

These bright, octave unison synth lead sounds are suitable for dance music.

These detuned synth lead sounds are suitable for dance music.
These light and round synth sounds are appropriate for solos and leads.

These bright, round and fresh synth sounds are reminiscent of the clarinet.

ORGAN

No.

Voice Name

Synth Strs 1

Synth Strs 2

Synth Strs 3

Synth Strs 4

Synth Strs 5

Synth Strs 6

Synth Strs 7

Synth Strs 8

Synth Strs 9

Synth Strs 10

Description
These are spacious synth strings sounds.

Light SynStrings

This is a useful synth strings sound.

FatSynStrings

This is a fat synth strings sound.

Oct SynStrings 1

These are synth strings played in octaves.

Oct SynStrings 2

Synth Bell 1

Synth Bell 2

Synth Bell 3

Synth Bell 4

Synth Bell 5

Vox Bell

This is a combination of Voice Pad and Synth Bell.

Pop Synth Bell

This is a bright synth bell sound.

Synth Decay 1

These are unique decaying synth sounds.

Synth Decay 2

Synth Decay 3

Synth Decay 4

Synth Sequence

This synth sound is suitable for sequence patterns and arpeggios.

TranceSequence 1

These synth sounds are suitable for sequence patterns and arpeggios used in dance music.

TranceSequence 2

Percussive Seq 1

Percussive Seq 2

Pipe Organ 1

Pipe Organ 2

Pipe Organ 3

Pipe Organ 4

Pipe Organ 5

Theatre Organ 1

Theatre Organ 2

Theatre Organ 3

Theatre Organ 4

Theatre Organ 5

Theatre Organ 6

Theatre Organ 7

Theatre Organ 8

TheatreTp&Kinura

Theatre Tp 16&8

These are synth sounds with variations including crisp, clangorous bright bell and soft, glassy sounds.

Voices

Category
SYNTH

These percussive synth sounds are suitable for sequence patterns and arpeggios.
The pipe organ has its roots in churches and cathedrals, and features a solemn, rich, majestic sound.
The Voices here range from soft to powerful.

This instrument evokes feelings of nostalgia, having been used extensively in silent movie theaters,
skating rinks, restaurants (especially pizzerias) and baseball stadiums.

Harmonica 1

Harmonica 2

This instrument has a wide expressive range, and can be used for emotional, soft ballads and solos.

Harmonica 3

Reed Organ

This is a small organ without pipes and features a warm sound.

Bandoneon 1

This musical instrument is often used for tango, and features a characteristic initial attack.

Bandoneon 2

Accordion 1

Accordion 2

A versatile, multi-purpose instrument that has a home in a wide variety of genres, including French
chanson, Argentinian tango, polka and Tex-Mex music.

Accordion 3

Accordion 4

AccordionMuset.

This is a musette tone accordion with a bright and unique tuning.

Jazz Organ 1

Jazz Organ 2

These electric organ sounds — great for jazz and R&B — are designed to be used with the rich rotary
speaker effect.

Jazz Organ 3

Jazz Organ 4

Jazz Organ 5

Jazz Organ 6

Jazz Organ 7

Vintage Organ

This is a vintage organ sound.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Category
ORGAN

2
Voices
PIANO

GUITAR

No.
35

Voice Name

Description

Vin Organ Slow 1

These vintage organ sounds feature a rotary speaker at slow speed.

Vin Organ Slow 2

VintageOrganFast

This vintage organ sound features a rotary speaker at fast speed.

Pop Organ 1

These are multi-purpose organ sounds.

Pop Organ 2

Pop Organ 3

Pop Organ 4

Pop Organ 5

Pop Organ 6

Rock Organ 1

Rock Organ 2

Rock Organ 3

RockOrgan Slow 1

RockOrgan Slow 2

RockOrgan Slow 3

RockOrgan Slow 4

Rock Organ Fast

This rock organ sound features a rotary speaker at fast speed.

Organ Bass 1

These pipe organ bass and jazz organ bass sounds are for lower register parts.

Organ Bass 2

Organ Bass 3

Organ Bass 4

Piano 1

Piano 2

Piano 3

These are hard, overdriven, distorted organ sounds, ideal for rock.

These rock organ sounds feature a rotary speaker at slow speed.

These are multi-purpose piano sounds.

Honkytonk Piano

This purposely out-of-tune piano sound is used in ragtime, older jazz and blues, and country rock music.

Octave Piano 1

Octave Piano 2

These are piano sounds played in octaves, including Voices that are an octave lower or two octaves
higher.

Octave Piano 3

Harpsichord 1

Harpsichord 2

This is the definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no
touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released.

Harpsichord 3

Clavichord

This is a soft keyboard instrument for classical music, with a unique sound when the keys are released.

DX E.Piano 1

These electric piano sounds are from the popular DX7 synthesizer.

DX E.Piano 2

DX E.Piano 3

DX E.Piano 4

DX E.Piano 5

DX E.Piano&Pad 1

DX E.Piano&Pad 2

Galaxy E.Piano

This is a bright sound with a strong touch response.

Stage E.Piano 1

Stage E.Piano 2

These electric piano Voices feature the characteristic hammer and tine sound, with a bright yet warm
feel. They also have tremolo effects.

Stage E.Piano 3

Stage E.Piano 4

Stage E.Piano 5

Stage E.Piano 6

Stack E.Piano 1

Stack E.Piano 2

Clavi 1

Clavi 2

These sounds combine the popular DX7 synthesizer with pads.

These bright electric pianos are characterized by their sharp attack sound.
These are funky sounds of a popular 1960’s era keyboard.

Clavi 3

Nylon Guitar 1

Nylon Guitar 2

Nylon Guitar 3

S-Nylon Guitar 1

This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato
note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the
noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated
through legato playing.

S-Nylon Guitar 2

This sound is the same as S-Nylon Guitar 1, but without the legato effect or the noise caused by fingers
touching strings.

Flamenco Guitar

S-FlamencoGuitar

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

These sounds are of an acoustic guitar with nylon strings.

This guitar sound is suitable for flamenco music.

PERCUSSION

No.

Voice Name

Description

Steel Guitar 1

These sounds are acoustic guitar with steel strings.

Steel Guitar 2

S-Steel Guitar 1

S-Steel Guitar 2

This sound is the same as S-Steel Guitar 1, but without the legato effect or the noise caused by fingers
touching strings.

12Str Guitar

This is a 12-string classic guitar with gorgeous sounds.

Jazz Guitar 1

These soft electric guitars are good for jazz solo passages.

Jazz Guitar 2

Jazz Guitar Oct

S-Jazz Guitar

E.Guitar 1

E.Guitar 2

E.Guitar 3

Clean Guitar 1

Clean Guitar 2

Clean Guitar 3

Clean Guitar 4

E.Guitar Amp 1

E.Guitar Amp 2

E.Guitar Amp 3

Muted Guitar 1

Muted Guitar 2

This electric guitar is mixed with a Voice one octave higher, and is good for jazz solo passages.
*2

This is a Super Articulation Voice that features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato
note that is between a minor 2nd and a perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the
noise caused by fingers muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato
playing.
These electric guitar sounds include distortion and overdrive effects, as well a clean electric guitar.

Voices

Category
GUITAR

These electric guitar sounds are suitable for accompaniment and arpeggios.

These electric guitar sounds feature amp simulations.

These are muted guitar sounds.

Muted Guitar 3

S-Clean Guitar 1

S-Clean Guitar 2

Distortion Gtr 1

Distortion Gtr 2

Distortion Gtr 3

Distortion Gtr 4

Distortion Gtr 5

Distortion Gtr 6

Distortion Gtr 7

S-Dist Solid 1

This is a distorted electric guitar sound that is suitable for solos. It is a Super Articulation Voice that
features hammering or slides only if you play an accented legato note that is between a minor 2nd and a
perfect 4th above the current note. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and
muting strings is reproduced. Natural sounds can be simulated through legato playing.

S-Dist Solid 2

This is a distorted electric guitar sound that is suitable for solos. It is a Super Articulation Voice. When
you release a key, the noise caused by fingers touching and muting strings is reproduced. Natural
sounds can be simulated through legato playing.

These are Super Articulation Voices. When you release a key, the noise caused by fingers muting strings
is reproduced.
These are distorted guitar sounds.

Banjo

This sound is suitable for country and dixieland jazz.

Mandolin

This instrument is used commonly in Italian music and features a realistic plucked sound.

Pedal Steel Gtr1

These are Hawaiian guitar sounds. They are effective when used with the glide function.

Pedal Steel Gtr2

Harp 1

Harp 2

The gentle, beautiful sound of this instrument makes it ideal for soft passages, and it is often played
glissando for dramatic effect.

Harp 3

Vibraphone 1

Vibraphone 2

Marimba 1

Marimba 2

This instrument is similar to the xylophone and has resonant tubes under the sound plates. However, the
wooden keys give it a soft, more organic sound, and it has an especially rich lower register, giving it a
wide expressive range and making it useful as a solo instrument.

Xylophone

This instrument features dry and tight sounds.

Glockenspiel 1

These are sounds of a small glockenspiel, and feature a soft, shining sound.

Glockenspiel 2

This percussion instrument utilizes resonators fitted with metal discs, which in turn are connected by rod
to a motor — which produces the distinctive, warm tremolo effect heard in some jazz music.

Celesta 1

Celesta 2

The celesta is similar in structure to the piano. Hammers move and hit metal bars (similar to the
glockenspiel) when the keys are played, producing a pretty, somewhat fragile bell sound.

Music Box 1

These are music box sounds.

Music Box 2

Chime 1

Chime 2

Chime 3

These are chime sounds.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Category
TIMPANI

ELECTRIC
BASS

2
Voices
SYNTH BASS

WORLD

No.

Voice Name

Description

Timpani 1

Timpani 2

This dramatic sounding percussion instrument is unlike most drums in that it produces a definite pitch. It
adds extra power and dynamic impact when played in unison with other instruments and plays a very
important role in orchestral music.

Timpani Roll 1

These are timpani sounds played with a drum roll technique.

Timpani Roll 2

Fingered Bass 1

Fingered Bass 2

Fingered Bass 3

Fingered Bass 4

Fingered Bass 5

Fingered Bass 6

Fingered Bass 7

Slap Bass 1

Slap Bass 2

Slap Bass 3

Slap Bass 4

Slap Bass 5

Picked Bass 1

Picked Bass 2

Picked Bass 3

Picked Bass 4

Picked Bass 5

Fretless Bass 1

Fretless Bass 2

Fretless Bass 3

Fretless Bass 4

Funk Bass 1

Funk Bass 2

Funk Bass 3

Funk Bass 4

Funk Bass 5

Funk Bass 6

Funk Bass 7

Dance Bass 1

Dance Bass 2

Dance Bass 3

Dance Bass 4

Dance Bass 5

Dance Bass 6

Dance Bass 7

Dance Bass 8

Dance Bass 9

Dance Bass 10

Smooth Bass 1

Smooth Bass 2

Smooth Bass 3

Smooth Bass 4

Fat Bass 1

Fat Bass 2

These are electric bass sounds played by finger.

These are percussive, slapped bass sounds. These slap bass Voices feature variations in the ‘thickness’
of the sounds and differences in how the strings are played.

These electric bass Voices feature the bright attack of playing with a pick, and have variations in the
‘thickness’ of the sounds.

These are smooth fretless bass sounds. These fretless bass Voices have a unique sound, and are best
used with subtle, sliding pitch changes.

These are synth bass sounds that feature a characteristic initial attack.

These synth bass sounds are suitable for dance music.

These are contemporary, “cool” synth bass sounds.

These are fat synth bass sounds.

Pan Flute 1

Pan Flute 2

Bagpipe

This is a traditional Scottish instrument, usually played with a continuous, low drone. The sound can be
melancholy as well as dramatic and inspiring.

Dulcimer

This is a characteristically clear and beautiful Voice.

Shakuhachi

This is a traditional Japanese recorder made of bamboo.

Yokobue

This is a traditional Japanese flute.

Shamisen

This traditional Japanese instrument features three strings and a small body covered with animal skin.
The bright, slightly buzzy sound is similar to the banjo, yet has a very strong Oriental flavor.

Koto

This is a Japanese koto sound.

Taishokoto

This is a Japanese Taisho koto sound.

Er Hu 1

Er Hu 2

Also known as the “Chinese violin,” this is a two-stringed bowed instrument, capable of producing sad,
mysterious, or joyful melodies.

Er Hu 3

Ban Hu

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

The pan flute (also known as “pan pipes”) is a simple instrument used in folk music of various countries,
and consists of several stopped pipes of increasing length bound together in one line. It is a beautiful
instrument that evokes the sound of wind in nature and is named after the Greek mythological god Pan.

This traditional Chinese instrument features a clear, full sound, and is used as a solo instrument.

No.

Voice Name

Description

Ma Tou Qin

This two-stringed bowed instrument has been passed down through generations by Mongolian nomads.
It is also known as the “horse-headed violin,” and features a strong yet sometimes delicate tone.

Di Zi

This is a Chinese flute. It features a unique sound produced by the vibration of a thinly stretched
membrane.

Suo Na

This double-reed instrument is similar to an oboe, and features a joyful sound.

Hu Lu Si

This Chinese folk instrument is a reed instrument with three bamboo pipes that pass through a gourd.
The center pipe is played, while the two outer pipes are typically drone pipes. It features a soft and
graceful sound.

Sheng

The Chinese sheng is a mouth-blown free reed instrument consisting of vertical tubes, and apparently
inspired the invention of the harmonica, accordion and reed organ.

Gu Zheng 1

Gu Zheng 2

This instrument is also called the Chinese koto. It has a long history during which it grew from 13 strings
to the currently popular 21-string version. There are also 23-string and 25-string versions. It features a
bright sound that is suitable for beautiful and lyrical melodies.

Yang Qin

This percussive stringed instrument is a member of the zither family. Sound is produced by striking the
strings with beaters. It is a relatively new Chinese instrument with origins influenced by the West.

Pi Pa

This Chinese lute has a pear-shaped body, and it is used often for solo parts as well as accompaniment
and ensembles.

Liu Qin

This instrument is smaller than the Pi Pa, and is also called a “willow lute” because its shape resembles
a leaf of a willow tree. It features a beautiful, crystal clear treble sound.

San Xian

This traditional three-stringed Chinese instrument features snake skin stretched over both sides of a
resonator. It is played with fingerpicks worn on the fingers to pluck the strings.

Surnay

This vertical reed flute features a high-pitched tone.

Oud

This traditional stringed instrument is from Saudi Arabia, Turkey, and nearby regions.

Sitar

This Indian (or Hindustani) classical instrument has different resonances in the lower and mid/high
ranges.

Steel Drum

This pitched percussion instrument, originating in Trinidad in the West Indies, is made from 55-gallon oil
drums and is apparently the only acoustic instrument invented in the 20th century. It has a bright and
joyful tropical sound that belies its industrial source.

Kalimba

S-Irish Pipe

2
Voices

Category
WORLD

African instrument.
*1
*2

This Super Articulation Voice uses AEM technology to reproduce the characteristics of the Irish pipe.
Colorful expression is possible by turning Auto Articulation on and using Pitch Bend and grace notes.

*1 The Voices using AEM technology can be used for the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice sections, but they cannot be used for the Upper Keyboard Voice and
Lower Keyboard Voice sections.
*2 The Slide function (in the Voice Condition Display) is not applied to the Super Articulation Voices (having names beginning with the prefix “S-”).

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

3 Voice Controls and Effects
The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the
sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects.
Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound.
However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the controls
and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital.
The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice sections.
Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied differently
according to the different types: independently for each Voice section, independently for each
keyboard or globally for the entire system.

Controls and Effects

Selecting from the Voice Condition display, Pages 1-6

Page 1

Page 2

Page 3

Page 4

Page 5

Selecting
from
the panel

Page 6

Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied
Reference
Lead Voice
Lower Keyboard
Pedalboard
page for Upper Keyboard
changing
Upper Keyboard
Lower Keyboard
Pedalboard
the settings
Lead Voice 1, 2
Voice 1, 2
Voice 1, 2
Voice 1, 2

Volume

page 54



Reverb (send level)

page 54



Pan

page 54



Feet

page 54



Brilliance

page 55



Initial Touch

page 55



–*

After Touch

page 55



–*

Touch Vibrato

page 55



–*

Vibrato

page 56



Delay

page 56



Depth

page 56



Speed

page 56



Effect

page 57



Type

page 58



Parameters

page 58



Value

page 58



Transpose

page 58



Tune

page 58



Slide

page 59

–



–

Slide Time

page 59

–



–

Auto Articulation

page 59

–



–

Priority

page 59

–

 **

–

Rotary Speaker

page 60



Reverb (Depth)

page 61

Sustain

page 63






–

* Although Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato are not applied to the Pedal Voices on the Pedalboard, they will be applied to the Pedal
Voices on the Lower Keyboard when you turn the To Lower function to on.
** Priority is applicable only for Lead Voice 2.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Selecting from the Voice Condition

1 display

To call up the Voice Condition display:
Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again. The Voice
Condition display appears.

Voice Condition Display

Voice Controls and Effects

Currently selected page

Each voice group’s Voice Condition (except for Lead Voice) consists of five display
pages. Voice Condition of the Lead Voice consists of six pages.

Setting and adjusting the parameters
Press the [A] – [D] buttons at the right of the display corresponding to the items or
parameters you want to change, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the desired
setting.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Condition [Page 1]

1
2
3
4

In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including volume and reverb
send level.

1 Volume
Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 34 for more information.

Voice Controls and Effects

Reference Page
Reverb Depth (page 61)

2 Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section.
When the Reverb Depth setting in the Reverb display is set to the minimum, the
setting here will have no effect. See page 61 for details.
3 Panning
Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are
available.
Range: L3 – C – R3
4 Feet
Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide
register. There are three settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2'
setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. Preset is the original (factory) setting.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Condition [Page 2]

Press the Page buttons to select Page 2.

1
2
3
4
When the Pedal Voice is selected
When the Pedal Voice is selected, the Initial
Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato values
are displayed in parentheses. Although you
cannot use these functions with the Pedal
Voices on the Pedalboard, you can use them
with the Pedal Voices on the Lower Keyboard
when you turn the To Lower function to on
(page 38).

Voice Controls and Effects

1 Brilliance
For adjusting the tonal quality of the Voice, making it brighter or warmer. Set the
desired brilliance for each Voice over a range of “-3” (warmest) to “+3” (brightest).
2 Initial Touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the keys. The
harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will
become. Higher settings make the change wider. The minimum setting produces no
effect.
Range: 0 – 14
3 After Touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to the keys after
playing them. The harder you press down on the keys, the greater the volume and the
brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum
setting produces no effect.
Range: 0 – 14

NOTE
Initial Touch may not be
effective on some organ
Voices.

NOTE
After Touch has no effect on
percussive Voices (such as
piano or vibraphone),
percussion sounds, or some
organ Voices.

4 Touch Vibrato
Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply
vibrato to individual notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you press down
the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth
cannot be controlled, no matter how hard you press the keys.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Condition [Page 3]

Press the Page buttons to select Page 3.

Vibrato

The Vibrato function varies the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and
more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some
Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected.
Vibrato Control
Speed
Delay
Depth

Voice Controls and Effects

1 Preset/User
Toggles between PRESET and USER.
Selecting PRESET calls up the original
(factory) vibrato settings for the Voice.
When PRESET is selected, the Delay, Depth
and Speed parameters cannot be edited.
Selecting User lets you adjust the vibrato
settings for yourself.

1
2
3
4

2 Delay
Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start
of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato onset.
Range: 0 – 14
3 Depth
Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more
pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect.
Range: 0 – 14
4 Speed
Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of the
vibrato.
Range: 0 – 14

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Voice Condition [Page 4]

Press the Page buttons to select Page 4.
Effect Category

1
2
3
4

Effect

You can select the effects applied to each Voice section.

PRESET

The effect type that best matches and is most suited to the currently selected sound
is automatically selected.

REVERB

Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound, recreating the subtle ambience
and depth of actual performance spaces and rooms.

DELAY

Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or echoes. This is also useful for
creating rhythmic repeats in the sound.

ER/KARAOKE

The ER effect isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb sound,
while Karaoke recreates the deep echo effect used in Karaoke sing-along
applications.

CHORUS

Creates a warm effect as if several instances of the same sound were playing at
once. Makes the overall sound richer, “fatter” and more animated.

FLANGER

This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect, similar to Chorus but with a
brighter more resonant sound.

PHASER

Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre changes and a pronounced up/down
filter sweep effect.

TREMOLO/AUTO
PAN

This periodically changes the volume and has the effect of moving the sound image
both front and back, and left and right.

ROTARY SPEAKER

This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ sounds) recreates the rich,
animated pulsing sound of a rotating speaker horn.
The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with the Left
Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation). Keep in mind that the
Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by selecting it. To use the Rotary
Speaker effect, see “Rotary Speaker” on page 60.

DISTORTION

This effect adds distortion to the sound.

DISTORTION+

A combination of Distortion, Delay and Compressor effects.

AMP SIMULATOR

A simulation of a guitar amp or microphone amp.

WAH

This uses an automatic up/down filter sweep to change the timbre of the sound,
producing a “wah-wah” sound.

DYNAMIC

This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the overall dynamic range of the
sound, and has a gain control—letting you make soft sounds louder, and thus give
more “punch” to the sound.

EQ/ENHANCER

EQ: This processing tool lets you change the level for specific frequency ranges in
the sound, and affects the overall sound quality.
Enhancer: This effect emphasizes and enhances the overtones in the high
frequency sound range overtone—not merely making the sound brighter, but giving
it more clarity and presence.

PITCH CHANGE

Changes the pitch of the input signal.

MISCELLANEOUS

This category contains a wide range of special effects.

THRU

Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing.

Voice Controls and Effects

1 Effect Category
You can select the Effect Category applied to each Voice section.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Reference Page
Effect List (page 64)

2 Effect Type
Effect types are displayed corresponding to the selected effect category.

Effect Parameters
You can set the parameters of effect type in 3 and 4 below. Generally, the effect
parameters settings are optimally balanced for the selected effect type, so there is no
need to follow the steps below unless you want to change the setting.
If you want to change the setting, select the parameter in 3, then change the value in
4. For details on each parameter type, page 64.
If you want to use the Rotary Speaker effect, set the Speed and Mode settings in the
Rotary Speaker display. See “Rotary Speaker” on page 60.

3 Parameters
Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.

Voice Controls and Effects

4 Value setting

Voice Condition [Page 5]

Press the Page buttons to select Page 5.

1
2

Reference Page
Transpose (for entire
instrument); (page 181)

Reference Page
Pitch (for entire instrument);
(page 181)

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

1 Transpose
Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section.
Range: -6 – +6
2 Tune
Determines the fine pitch settings for each Voice section, letting you create a warmer,
richer sound by slightly detuning one Voice relative to another.
Range: -64 – +63

Voice Condition [Page 6] (only for Lead Voice)

Press the Page buttons to select Page 6.

1
2
3
4

In this Page, you can set whether or not the Slide function/Auto Articulation function
is applied to the Lead Voice, and how the monophonic Lead Voice 2 responds to your
polyphonic playing (with Last or Top mode).
NOTE

Voice Controls and Effects

1 Slide On/Off
Slide applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is
effective within a one-octave range for the Lead Voice.
Determines the on/off status of the Slide effect.

3
The parameters here are not
available when a Super
Articulation Voice is
selected.

2 Slide Time
Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. The higher the value, the
slower the speed.
Range: 0 – 14
3 Auto Articulation
Determines the on/off status of the Auto Articulation effect. The settings here,
available only for Super Articulation Voices, produce effects (such as pitch bend and
glissando) which are characteristic of the corresponding acoustic instrument, making
your keyboard performance more realistic. Setting this to ON will apply various
effects such as pitch bend and glissando to your keyboard performance.
4 Priority (only for Lead Voice 2)
Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top.
• LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or more keys are played
simultaneously.
• TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously.

NOTE
For information about what
effect is produced by setting
Auto Articulation to ON, see
“Voice List” on pages 42. As
listed on these pages, Auto
Articulation is not available
for some Voices.

NOTE
Priority will not function when
Solo function is on.

Reference Page
About the Solo function
(page 39)

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Rotary Speaker


Select “Rotary Speaker” as the effect category.
Select “Rotary Speaker” here

3
Voice Controls and Effects

Set the Speed Control to on, then adjust the rotating speed and
mode of the Rotary Speaker.
Speed Control, Speed and Mode settings are specified in the Rotary Speaker
display. The Rotary Speaker display can be called up from Page 3 of the Utility
display. Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Utility display, then select
Page 3 by using the Page buttons. The settings in this display are common to all
Voice sections.
Rotary Speaker Display

1
2
3

1 Speed Control
Determines the on/off setting of the Rotary Speaker mode. When this is set to on,
rotating speed of the Rotary Speaker becomes fast, and the speed can be set in “2
Speed.” When set to off, the rotating speed of the Rotary Speaker becomes slow or
stops; a slow chorus effect is applied or the Rotary Speaker effect turns off (stops
completely). Slow or Stop can be set in “3 Mode.”

2 Speed
Determines the speed of the speaker rotation.
Press the [B] button to select the “Speed,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change
the setting.
Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz

3 Mode
Determines the slow/stop mode when the “Speed Control” is set to off. If Slow is
selected, a slow chorus effect is applied. If Stop is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect
turns off (stops completely).
Pressing the [C] button alternates between slow and stop.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the
effect in real time from the panel (in UTILITY) or conveniently from the Left
Footswitch.

Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel or from the Left
Footswitch.
You can control Rotary Speaker on/off not only from the panel (Speed Control
parameter in UTILITY, Page 3), but also by using the Left Footswitch, if the
Footswitch has been properly assigned.
See “4 Rotary Speaker” on page 180 for details.

3
Voice Controls and Effects

2 Selecting from the panel
The Reverb and Sustain displays are called up by pressing the respective buttons on the
panel.

Reverb


Reverb adds an ambient echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a
performance in a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for the
entire system.
To adjust the reverb effect and call up the Reverb pages, press one of the REVERB
buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the Reverb effect. The Reverb display
appears.

The Reverb display consists of two pages.
[Page 1] Reverb Display

1
2
3

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

NOTE
Depending on the reverb
depth value (set in the
Reverb display), two
adjacent REVERB button
lamps may be lit at the same
time, indicating an
intermediate position.

Reference Page
The amount of reverb
applied to each Voice
section (page 54)

Reference Page
Changing the rhythm
volume/reverb (page 74)

Reference Page
Effect List (page 64)

1 Depth
Determines the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds. Coarse
reverb depth settings are made with the panel REVERB buttons. The REVERB buttons
let you make coarse adjustment over a five-step range to the reverb depth, while this
parameter gives you fine control. When this parameter is set to the minimum, the
settings in Voice Condition display, Page 1 (page 54) have no effect.
Range: 0 – 24
2 Type
Selects the Reverb Type for the Voice sections. Several types can be selected: Room,
Hall, Stage, and so on. After changing the reverb type, the Time parameter below is
automatically changed corresponding to the selected reverb type.

Voice Controls and Effects

3 Time
Determines the reverb length for the Voice sections.
Higher settings result in a longer reverb sound.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s

[Page 2] Reverb Display

1
2

Reference Page
Effect List (page 64)

1 Type
Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment and keyboard percussion.
2 Time
Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm, accompaniment and keyboard
percussion.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Sustain


The sustain effect, selectable for the Upper, Lower and Pedal Voices, causes Voices to
gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length
settings are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum expressive control.
The Sustain effect is not applied to the Lead Voices.
Press one of the SUSTAIN buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the sustain.
The SUSTAIN display appears.

Voice Controls and Effects

3
Sustain On/Off
The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that sustain is on. Press the button again to
turn sustain off and the lamp turns off. When the lamp is off, sustain does not affect
the corresponding keyboard. Remember to check whether the sustain button lamps
are on or off before you start to play.

Sustain Length
Sustain Display [Page 1]

Sustain Display [Page 2]

The display shows the current sustain length values for each keyboard. Use the Page
buttons and appropriate [A] – [D] buttons to select the desired Voice section, then use
the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.
Range: 0 – 12

NOTE
The minimum setting results
in no sustain. Turning sustain
off automatically resets the
sustain length to the default
setting.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

3 Effect List
EFFECT TYPE

Description

REVERB
HALL 1

TEMPO CROSS1

Tempo-synchronized cross delay.

TEMPO CROSS2

HALL 3

TEMPO CROSS3

HALL M

TEMPO CROSS4

HALL L

ER/KARAOKE

XG HALL 1

ER 1

XG HALL 2

ER 2

ROOM 2

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a
room.

ROOM 3

GATE REVERB1
GATE REVERB2

Isolates only the early reflection
components of the reverb.
Creates a unique, powerful effect by
cutting short the reverberation of a deep
reverb.

REVERS GATE

Simulates gated reverb played back in
reverse.

ROOM S

KARAOKE 1

ROOM M

KARAOKE 2

Echo for karaoke. Delay effect with
feedback.

ROOM L

KARAOKE 3

XG ROOM 1

CHORUS

XG ROOM 2

CHORUS 1

XG ROOM 3

CHORUS 2

ROOM 4
Voice Controls and Effects

STAGE 1
STAGE 2

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a
stage. Suitable for solo instruments.

XG STAGE 1
PLATE 1
PLATE 2

Creates an effect of warmth and depth by
periodically changing the pitch.

XG CHORUS 1
XG CHORUS 2
XG CHORUS 3

XG STAGE 2

XG CHORUS 4
Reverb simulating the effect of a vibrating
plate reverb.

XG PLATE

GM CHORUS 1
GM CHORUS 2
GM CHORUS 3

GM PLATE

GM CHORUS 4

WHITE ROOM

A short reverb creating a warm ambience.

FB CHORUS

ATMO HALL

A long reverb creating a wide spatial
effect.

CHORUS FAST

ACOSTIC ROOM

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a
room. Standard setting.

DRUMS ROOM

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a
room. For drum sounds.

CHORUS LITE
AMB CHORUS

Chorus with early reflection sound.

CELESTE 1

A deeper chorus that adds modulation
and spaciousness to the sound with a 3phase LFO.

CELESTE 2

PERC ROOM

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a
room. For percussion sounds.

CELESTE 3

TUNNEL

Reverb simulating a cylindrical space
expanding to left and right.

AMB CELESTE

Celeste effect with early reflection sound.

SYMPHONIC

A chorus that adds more stages to the
modulation of Celeste.

CANYON
BASEMENT

A hypothetical acoustic space which
extends without limit.
A reverb with a unique resonance.

CELESTE 4

XG SYMPHONIC
AMB SYMPHO

Symphonic effect with early reflection
sound.

ENS DETUNE 1

Chorus without modulation, created by
adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound.

DELAY
DELAY LCR
XG DLY LCR

Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and
C (center).

DELAY LR

Produces two delayed sounds: L and R.

ECHO

Produces two independent delayed
sounds: L and R. Also capable of
producing vintage delay effects.

CROSS DELAY1
CROSS DELAY2
TEMPO DELAY1

ENS DETUNE 2
FLANGER
FLANGER 1
FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 1

The feedback of the two delayed sounds
is crossed.

XG FLANGER 2

Tempo-synchronized delay.

GM FLANGER

TEMPO DELAY2

Description
Tempo-synchronized echo.

HALL 2

ROOM 1

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.

EFFECT TYPE
TEMPO ECHO

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

XG FLANGER 3

Creates a modulating effect or a sound
similar to that of a jet airplane.

Description
Simulates an analog flanger. Irregular LFO
waveforms can also be selected.

TEMP FLANGER

Tempo-synchronized flanger.

DYNA FLANGER

Enables the delay time of the flanger to
respond dynamically to the input level.

VIN FLANGER1

Simulates an analog flanger, with a deep
vintage sound.

VIN FLANGER2
AMB FLANGER

PHASER 2

Periodically modulates the phase to add
modulation to the sound.

PHASER 3
EP PHASER 1
EP PHASER 2

DUAL ROTSP 2
DUAL ROT WRM
DIST+ROT SP

Distortion and rotary speaker connected
in series.

ODRV+ROT SP

Overdrive and rotary speaker connected
in series.

AMP+ROT SP

Amp simulator and rotary speaker
connected in series.

DIST+2ROT SP

Distortion and 2-way rotary speaker
connected in series.

ODRV+2ROT SP
Periodically modulates the phase to add
modulation to the sound. For electric
piano.

Overdrive and 2-way rotary speaker
connected in series.

AMP+2ROT SP

Amp simulator and 2-way rotary speaker
connected in series.

Tempo-synchronized phaser.

DISTORTION

EP PHASER 3
TEMP PHASER1
TEMP PHASER2

DIST HARD 1

DYNA PHASER

Enables the phaser modulation frequency
to respond dynamically to the input level.

DIST HARD 2

VIN PHASER 1

Simulates an analog phaser, with a deep
vintage sound.

DIST SOFT 2

VIN PHASER 2

Description
More complex and textured simulation of
the independent rotation of the rotary
speaker horn and rotor. (Bright / Warm)

DUAL ROT BRT

Flanger with early reflection sound.

PHASER
PHASER 1

EFFECT TYPE
DUAL ROTSP 1

Distortion is an effect that adds “dirty”
and “edgy” noise/distortion to the sound.
(Hard / Soft)

DIST SOFT 1
ST DIST HARD

Stereo distortion. (Hard / Soft)

VIN PHSR ST1

ST DIST SOFT

VIN PHSR ST2

OVERDRIVE

Adds mild distortion to the sound.

VIN PHSR ST3

ST OVERDRIVE

Stereo overdrive.

VIN PHSR ST4

XG DIST

Adds some “edgy” distortion to the
sound.

XG ST DIST

Stereo distortion.

TREMOLO 2

V_DIST HARD

XG TREMOLO

V_DIST SOFT

Simulates the sound of a vintage tube,
fuzz effect, etc.

EP TREMOLO

COMP+DIST

GT TREMOLO 1

XG CMP+DIST

TREMOLO/AUTO PAN
TREMOLO 1

Periodically changes the volume.

GT TREMOLO 2
ORG TREMOLO

V_DIST WARM

VIBE VIBRATE

Adds an vibrato effect, much like that of a
vibraphone.

V_DIST CLS H

T_TREMOLO

Tempo-synchronized tremolo.

V_DIST METAL

AUTO PAN

Periodically moves the sound image both
left and right, and front and back.

V_DIST CRUNC

XG AUTO PAN1
XG AUTO PAN2

Simulates the sound of a vintage tube,
fuzz effect, etc. (Warm / Classic, Hard /
Classic, Soft / Metal / Crunch / Blues /
Edge / Solid / Clean / Twin / Rockabilly /
Jazz Clean / Fusion)

V_DIST BLUES
V_DIST SOLID

Tempo-synchronized auto pan.

T_AUTO PAN 2

V_DIST CLN 1
V_DIST CLN 2

ROTARY SPEAKER
XG ROTARY SP

V_DIST CLS S

Since a Compressor is included in the
first stage, steady distortion can be
produced regardless of changes in input
level.

V_DIST EDGY

EP AUTO PAN
T_AUTO PAN 1

V_DIST TWIN
Simulates a rotary speaker.

V_DIST ROCA

ROTARY SP 1

V_DST JZ CLN

ROTARY SP 2

V_DST FUSION

ROTARY SP 3

DISTORTION+

ROTARY SP 4

DIST+DELAY

Distortion and Delay connected in series.

ROTARY SP 5

ODRV+DELAY

Overdrive and Delay connected in series.

XG DIST+DLY

Distortion and Delay connected in series.

2WAY ROT SP

3
Voice Controls and Effects

EFFECT TYPE
V_FLANGER

Simulates a rotary speaker horn and rotor
by dividing them into H (high) and L (low)
bands.

XG ODRV+DLY

Overdrive and Delay connected in series.

CMP+DIST+DLY

Compressor, Distortion and Delay
connected in series.

CMP+ODRV+DLY

Compressor, Overdrive and Delay
connected in series.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

EFFECT TYPE

EFFECT TYPE
B LGND D CLN

British stack amp simulator with crunch
sound settings.

XG CMP+OD+DL

Compressor, Overdrive and Delay
connected in series.

US CMB TWIN

Simulates an American combo amp.

USCMB RCH CL

V_DIST H+DLY

V Distortion Hard and Delay connected in
series.

V_DIST S+DLY

V Distortion Soft and Delay connected in
series.

DIST+T DLY

Distortion and Tempo Delay connected in
series.

JZ CMB WARM

ODRV+T DLY

Overdrive and Tempo Delay connected in
series.

US HI GN RIF

CMP+DST+TDLY

Compressor, Distortion and Tempo Delay
connected in series.

CMP+OD+TDLY2

Compressor, Overdrive and Tempo Delay
connected in series.

USCMB THN CL
USCMB CRUNCH
JZ CMB BASIC
US HI GN DTY

B LD DIRTY
B LD DRIVE

Voice Controls and Effects

CMP+OD+TDLY4

B LD HARD

CMP+OD+TDLY5

WAH
AUTO WAH

VDST H+TDLY2
VDST S+TDLY1
VDST S+TDLY2

V Distortion Hard and Tempo Delay
connected in series.

AMP SIM

Simulates a guitar amp.

Simulates analog wah, for a strongly
vintage sound. Periodically modulates the
center frequency of a wah filter.

TOUCH WAH 1

Enables you to change the wah effect
with the strength of your playing.

TOUCH WAH 2

Stereo amp simulator.

V_TOUCH WAH

Simulates analog wah, for a strongly
vintage sound. Enables you to change the
wah effect with the strength of your
playing.

AT WAH+DIST

Distortion can be applied to the output of
Auto Wah.

ST AMP SIM 3
ST AMP SIM 4

XG AT WH+DST

ST AMP SIM 5

AT WH+DST HD

XG ST AMP

AT WH+DST HV

ST AMP SOLID

AT WH+DST LT

ST AMP CRUNC

AT WAH+ODRV

ST AMP BLUES

XG AT WAH+OD

ST AMP CLEAN

Overdrive distortion can be applied to the
output of Auto Wah.

AT WH+OD HD

ST AMP HARP
SML ST OVRDR

Creates a “wah wah” sound by
periodically modulating the center
frequency of a wah filter.

V_AUTO WAH

ST AMP SIM 2

SML ST DIST

Simulates the sound of a British stack
amp.

TOUCH WAH 3

XG AMP SIM
ST AMP SIM 1

XG AUTO WAH

V Distortion Soft and Tempo Delay
connected in series.

AMP SIMULATOR

Simulates the sound of an American highgain amp.

US HIGN SOLO

B LD GAINER

VDST H+TDLY1

Simulates a jazz chorus combo amp.

US HIGN BURN

CMP+OD+TDLY3

CMP+OD+TDLY6

Stereo effect that simulates a small guitar
amp. Creates a distorted sound ideal for
electric guitar.

SML ST VINTG

AT WH+OD HV
AT WH+OD LT
TC WAH+DIST
XG TC WH+DST

SML ST HEAVY

Description

Compressor, Distortion and Delay
connected in series.

CMP+OD+TDLY1

Description

XG CMP+DT+DL

Distortion can be applied to the output of
Touch Wah.

TC WH+DST HD

B CMB CLASC

British combo amp simulator with vintage
sound settings.

B CMB TOPBST

British combo amp simulator with highend boost sound setting.

B CMB CUSTOM

British combo amp simulator with
commonly used settings.

B CMB HEAVY

British combo amp simulator with heavy
sound settings.

B LGND BLUES

British stack amp simulator with bluesy
sound settings.

TC WAH+OD LT

B LGND HVY 1

British stack amp simulator; heavy sound
1 settings.

EP TOUCH WAH

EP Touch Wah.

WAH+DST+TDLY

Wah, Distortion and Tempo Delay
connected in series.

WAH+OD+TDLY1

Wah, Overdrive and Delay connected in
series.

B LGND HVY 2

British stack amp simulator; heavy sound
2 settings.

B LGND CLEAN

British stack amp simulator with clean
sound settings.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

TC WH+DST HV
TC WH+DST LT
TC WAH+ODRV
XG TC WAH+OD

Overdrive distortion can be applied to the
output of Touch Wah.

TC WAH+OD HD
TC WAH+OD HV
CLAVI TC WAH

WAH+OD+TDLY2

Clavinet Touch Wah.

Description

EFFECT TYPE

Description

VOICE CANCEL

Attenuates the vocal part of a CD or other
source.

TALKING MOD

Adds a vowel sound to the input signal.

LO-FI

Degrades the audio quality of the input
signal.

DYNA FILTER

Enables the filter cutoff frequency to
respond dynamically to the input level.

DYNA RINGMOD

Enables the ring modulator to respond
dynamically to the input level.

RING MOD

An effect that modifies the pitch by
applying amplitude modulation to the high
frequency of the input.

ISOLATOR

Controls the level of a specified frequency
band of the input signal.

T_A.WH+OD LT

LOOP FX1

DYNAMIC

LOOP FX2

Degrades the audio quality of the input
signal.

XG WH+DST+DL
WAH+ODRV+DLY
XG WH+OD+DLY

Wah, Distortion and Delay connected in
series.
Wah, Overdrive and Delay connected in
series.

TEMPO AT WAH

Tempo-synchronized Auto Wah.

T_A.WH+DST

Tempo-synchronized Auto Wah. Distortion
can be applied to the output of Auto Wah.

T_A.WH+DSTHD
T_A.WH+DSTHV
T_A.WH+DSTLT
T_A.WH+ODRV
T_A.WH+OD HD

Tempo-synchronized Auto Wah. Overdrive
distortion can be applied to the output of
Auto Wah.

T_A.WH+OD HV

M BAND COMP

COMPRESSOR

Multi-band compressor that allows you to
adjust the compression effect for three
individual frequency bands.
Holds down the output level when a
specified input level is exceeded,
reducing wide dynamic differences in
sound volume. A sense of attack can also
be added to the sound.

LO-FI DRUM 1
LO-FI DRUM 2
LO-FI DRUM 3
LO-FI DRUM 4
DAMPER RESO

COMP MED

Compressor with medium setting.

THRU

COMP HEAVY

Compressor with heavy setting.

THRU

COMP MELODY

Compressor for a melody part.

COMP BASS

Compressor for a bass part.

V_COMPRESSOR

Simulates the vintage sound of an analog
compressor.

NOISE GATE

Removes unnecessary sound from the
original sound. Primarily used to remove
noise from the beginning and end of
distinct sounds.

Degrades the audio quality of the input
signal. Ideal for drum sounds.

Voice Controls and Effects

EFFECT TYPE
WAH+DIST+DLY

Recreates the deep and broadly resonant
sound that is produced when you use the
damper pedal.
Bypass without applying an effect.

EQ/ENHANCER
ST 2BAND EQ

A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW and
HIGH equalization.

ST 3BAND EQ

A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW, MID,
and HIGH equalization.

XG 3BAND EQ

A mono EQ with adjustable LOW, MID,
and HIGH equalization.

EQ DISCO

Equalizer effect that boosts both high and
low frequencies of the audio signal, as is
typical in most disco music.

EQ TELEPHONE

Equalizer effect that cuts both high and
low frequencies of the audio signal, for
simulating the sound heard through a
telephone receiver.

HM ENHANCER

Adds new harmonics to the input signal to
make the sound stand out.

XG HM ENHNCE
PITCH CHANGE
PITCH CHANGE

Changes the pitch of the input signal.

XG PCH CHG 1
XG PCH CHG 2
MISCELLANEOUS
AMBIENCE

Blurs the stereo positioning of the sound
to add spatial width.

IMPULSE EXP

Impulse expander that adds a more
metallic resonance.

RESONATOR

Adds sonic resonance characteristic of
wooden body instruments.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

This Electone features hundreds different real rhythms
featuring actual drum and percussion sampled
sounds. Automatic Accompaniment functions are
used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and
completely automatic accompaniment to match the
style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone
has a Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to
directly play drum and percussion sounds from the
Upper/Lower keyboards and Pedalboard.

1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons
Hundreds rhythms can be instantly selected with the ten rhythm buttons on the
front panel.

To select and play a rhythm


Press one of the Rhythm buttons in the RHYTHM section on the
front panel.
For example, if you have pressed the [DANCE] button, the following display
(Rhythm Menu) will appear.

Rhythm
Menu
Display

The Rhythm menu contains many Dance rhythms, and they will be shown in
the display.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Select the Rhythm in the Rhythm Menu display by rotating the
DATA CONTROL dial.
You can also select by pressing the [A]/[D] buttons.

Here, we’ve selected “12: Dancefloor.”

Press the [START] button to immediately start the rhythm.

Reference Page
Operating the rhythm from
the panel (page 71)

Reference Page

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Accompaniment (page 79)

To stop the rhythm, press this button again.
You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing
the buttons on the panel—and add the accompaniment to the rhythm.

Set the volume using the panel rhythm volume buttons.
The buttons have five volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no rhythm
sound, to a maximum of full volume.
Fine adjustments in the volume of the rhythm can also be made from the
Rhythm Condition display (page 74).

Reference Page
Changing the rhythm
volume/reverb (page 74)

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm Structure
Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a variation of the basic
rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up the beats while
you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm is played back.
INTRO
This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be
selected with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the rhythm
automatically shifts to the Main section.

Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit

MAIN
This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that can
be selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of several
measures repeats indefinitely.

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Selected Main section’s lamp is lit

FILL IN
This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a
repeating rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the
selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure pattern of
Fill In finishes playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main section.

Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes

BREAK
This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break
section is selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break
pattern finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.

The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected

ENDING
This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the rhythm
automatically stops. There are three Ending sections that can be selected with the
ENDING [1] – [3] buttons.

Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Operating the rhythm from the panel


You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the
buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic
interest and “spice” to your performance.

To start/stop the rhythm:
START
The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed. To stop the rhythm,
press the button again.

NOTE
When you start the rhythm
with [SYNCHRO START]
button, set the Lower/Pedal
Memory to on. When
Memory is off, releasing your
fingers from Lower keyboard
stops the rhythm. For details
on Memory and the A.B.C.
function, see page 82.

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

SYNCHRO START
The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.” The rhythm starts
when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard. When you start the
rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, pressing this button again stops the
rhythm.

INTRO
Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds a short introduction
before starting the actual (Main) rhythm. First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3]
buttons, then press the [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start the
rhythm.
While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display shows the countdown to
the first measure of the pattern. For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a
pattern in 4/4 time, the display at right appears:

ENDING
Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds an ending phrase
before stopping the rhythm. When you press the Ending button while rhythm is
playing back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the ending phrase is played.
You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the ENDING
button once again, while the ending is playing.

NOTE
Pressing the ENDING [1]
button during playback of
the Main section will first call
up the Fill In pattern, then the
Ending 1 pattern.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

To switch the rhythm sections:
You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired
MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section’s lamp (above the button)
lights.

To use the Fill In patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected
MAIN/FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and
the selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) flashes.

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

NOTE
You can record the currently
selected section to
Registration Memory.
However, you cannot record
the on/off status of the Auto
Fill In function.

When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The
Auto Fill In function is set in the Page 4 of the Rhythm Condition display. To call up
the Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the same rhythm
button again. Select Page 4 by using the Page buttons.

When Auto Fill is set to ON, the Fill In pattern is automatically played whenever you
switch the Main sections. Each press of the [A] button toggles between ON and OFF.

To use the Break patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK]
button. This lets you vary a repeating rhythm with dynamic breaks.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Adjusting the tempo


You can adjust the rhythm tempo by pressing the TEMPO buttons.
Tempo

2
Bar/Beat

Lights up at the first beat in the bar
during the playback of the Rhythm.

Bar (measure) Beat

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

1 TEMPO buttons
For adjusting the speed of the rhythm. Pressing the right button increases the tempo
and pressing the left button decreases it.
Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press the TEMPO buttons
simultaneously to restore the tempo to the original setting.
2 Tempo Indicator (Bar/Beat Indicator)
Tempo indicator shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per
minute.
The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute.
When the rhythm begins playing, the Tempo indicator changes function to a Bar/
Beat indicator.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Changing the rhythm volume/reverb


You can adjust the rhythm volume or amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and
the percussion sounds used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display. You
can also have a Fill In play automatically by setting the Auto Fill function to ON in
Display Page 4.
To call up the Rhythm Condition display, select the desired rhythm and press the
same rhythm button again.

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

[Page 1] Rhythm Condition Display

1
2

Reference Page
Reverb Depth (page 61)

NOTE
Depending on the volume
value (set in the display), two
adjacent Volume button
lamps may be lit at the same
time, indicating an
intermediate position.

Reference Page
Adjusting the volume and
amount of reverb applied to
the Accompaniment:
(page 81)

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

The buttons at the right side of the display and DATA CONTROL dial are used to
control the rhythm volume and reverb.
1 Percussion Volume
Fine adjustment of the rhythm percussion volume. Same as the panel Rhythm
Volume buttons.
Press the [A] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change
the setting.
Range: 0 – 24
2 Percussion Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm percussion.
When the Reverb Depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting
here will have no effect.
Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change
the setting.
Range: 0 – 24

2 Selecting rhythms from the User buttons
As with the Voice sections, the Rhythm section also has User buttons (numbered 1
or 2) from which rhythms can be selected. You can select original User rhythms that
have been created with this Electone or other models equipped with the Rhythm
Pattern Program function (such as the ELS series). For details on selecting original
User rhythms, see next page.
This also allows you to assign two or three rhythms from the same category to be
selected from different buttons; one from the original Rhythm button, and the others
from the User buttons.
For example, to call up “25: Modern Shuffle,” select the R&B category.

Press User button [1] at the right of the Rhythm buttons.

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

The rhythm category appears at the upper right of the display.

Select one of the Pages (categories) with the Page buttons.
In this case, select Page “R&B.”

Metronome
When you want to use the
Metronome, select the
“METRONOME” Page.

Currently selected Page

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Select the “25: Modern Shuffle” rhythm with the DATA CONTROL
dial.

This step assigns “25: Modern Shuffle” to the User button [1]. You can call up the
“25: Modern Shuffle” the next time you press the [1] button.

To call up a User rhythm
User rhythms created on other Electones that have Rhythm Pattern Programming
functions, such as the ELS series, can be selected and played from the User buttons
in the panel Rhythm section.
To call up the User rhythm, load back the registration containing the User rhythm to
Electone in advance.
For details on loading back the Registration, see “Recalling Recorded Registrations”
on page 154 and “Playing Back a Song” on page 155.
This procedure assigns the User rhythms to the User numbers 1 – 48.

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons.

Use the Page buttons to select Page “USER RHYTHM.”

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Select the User rhythm number (User 1-48) by turning the DATA
CONTROL dial.

3 Rhythm List
This list shows all available rhythms on the Electone.
Romantic Waltz

Simple March

Classical Menuet

POPS

Simple 6/8 March

Green Fantasia

Simple 8Beat Pop

Marching Band 1

*1
*2

Simple 3/4 Pop

Marching Band 2

*1
*2

SimpleShufflePop

Marching Band 3

8Beat Light 1

Hollywood Gospel

German March

8Beat Light 2

Gospel Party

6/8 March

16Beat

New Gospel

6/8 Kids

British 16Beat

Gospel Shuffle

Orchestral March

Guitar Pop

Jazz Funk

Classic 16Beat

Kool Funk

Fusion Shuffle

Let's Funk

Folk Rock

Motor City

Easy Pop

Detroit Pop

Galaxy Ship

SF March 1

SF March 2

Blockbuster

Broadway

Showtune

Wild West

Pop Classics

French 50s

Guitar Serenade

SWING&JAZZ
01

Simple Big Band

Simple ComboJazz

Big Band 1

Anime Fantasy

6/8 Organ March

Pub Piano

Baroque

Baroque Concerto

Strings Concerto

Choral Symphony

Brass Band Hymn

WALTZ
*1

Big Band 2

Big Band 3

Orch Big Band 1

Orch Big Band 2

Big Band Jazz

Big Band Fast

Big Band Bop

Movie Panther

Jungle Drum

Medium Jazz 1

Medium Jazz 2

Acoustic Jazz 1

Acoustic Jazz 2

Combo Swing

InstrumentalJazz

Manhattan Swing

Five-Four

Trad Piano Jazz

Jazz Ballad 1

Jazz Ballad 2

Waltz

Orchestral Waltz

Moonlight

Vienna Waltz 1

Winter Song

Vienna Waltz 2

Gentle Waltz

ChristmasBallad

Classic Waltz

Movie Swing

Jazz Waltz 1

Afro Cuban 1

Jazz Waltz 2

Afro Cuban 2

Jazz Waltz 3

Foxtrot

JazzWaltz Medium

ChristmasShuffle

Slowfox

Organ Groove

Frankly Soul

Live Soul Band

Soul Swing

6/8 Soul

Gospel Sisters

Chart Guitar Pop

Blueberry Blues

Jazz Pop

Blues Shuffle 1

British Pop

Blues Shuffle 2

Lovely Shuffle

Modern Shuffle

Unplugged 2

Cool R&B

Unplugged 3

Modern R&B

JPN Pop Shuffle

Soul R&B

JPN Idol Hits

Worship Fast

JPN 70s Anime

LATIN

JPN Soundtrack

Simple BossaNova

Cute Pop

Simple Samba

The 3rd Funk

Simple Mambo

Sunset DECA

Simple Rumba

US 70s TV Theme

Bossa Nova 1

Asian Pops

Bossa Nova 2

Scand Shuffle

Pop Bossa 1

60s Vintage Pop

Pop Bossa 2

60s Chart Swing

Bossa Brazil

Bubblegum Pop

70s ChartCountry

Pop Shuffle

Unplugged 1

Lounge Bossa

Big Band Samba

Euro Pop Organ

Light Samba

Euro Fox

Jazz Samba

Euro Pop

Mambo 1

Mambo 2
Rumba

Jazz Waltz Fast

Dixieland

R&B

Mariachi

Dixieland Jazz 1

Simple Funk

Snow Waltz

Dixieland Jazz 2

Simple R&B Balad

Rumba Flamenco

Cha Cha Cha

Vocal Waltz

Musette

Movie Soundtrack

Choir Soundtrack

35
36
37
38
39

Ragtime

Simple R&B Shfl

Charleston

Soul

Big Band Cha Cha

Orchestra Swing

16Beat Soul 1

Pop Cha Cha 1

16Beat Soul 2

Pop Cha Cha 2

Tap Dance Swing

4
*1
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

MARCH

*1 Contains a Section with no Auto Bass part. Such a Section cannot produce the bass sound even if A.B.C. is turned on.
*2 Contains a Section with no Drum part. When playing such a Section, make sure to turn Accompaniment on.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Salsa

8Beat Modern

ChartRockShuffle

Disco Fox

Montuno

16Beat Ballad 1

Chart Piano Shfl

Disco Philly

Calypso

16Beat Ballad 2

Beach Rock

Disco Teens 1

Danzon

6/8 Slow Rock

Surf Rock

Disco Teens 2

Bomba

Schlager 6/8

60s Rock

Disco Chocolate

Pop Latin

Big Rock Ballad

70s Rock

Saturday Night

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Beguine

90s Rock Ballad

80s Power Rock

90s Disco

Tango 1

Power Ballad

80s Pop Rock

70s Disco 1

Tango 2

Easy Ballad

80s Guitar Pop

70s Disco 2

Italian Tango

Love Song

00s Boy Band

Chart Pop

Guitar Rumba

Dramatic Ballad

Rock Shuffle

Ground Beat

WORLD MUSIC

Animation Ballad

Rock & Roll

Synth Pop

Bolero

70s Cool Ballad

6/8 Rock

UK Pop

Flamenco

70s Pop Duo

60s Rock & Roll

Turkish Eurobeat

Pop Flamenco

70s Glam Piano

Jive

Oriental Pop

Pasodoble

Movie Ballad

Swingin' Boogie

Pop Beat

Tarantella

80s Movie Ballad

Southern Rock

Garage 1

Sirtaki

BigScreenClassic

New Country

Garage 2

Hawaiian

Chart Ballad

Country Strum

Electronica

Mexican Dance

Analog Ballad

Disco Fox Rock

Club Latin

JPN Pop Rock 1

Latin Disco

JPN Pop Rock 2

US Hip Hop

*1
*1

Enka

Slow & Easy

Polka 1

Chillout

Polka 2

Easy Country

JPN Band Rock 1

Hip Hop Pop

Banda Polka

JPN Romantic Bld

JPN Band Rock 2

JPN Idol Pop 1

Zither Polka

JPN Folk Pop Duo

JPN Light Rock 1

JPN Idol Pop 2

Party Polka

JPN Dance Ballad

JPN Light Rock 2

JPN Idol Pop 3

Euro Polka

JPN R&B Ballad

JPN Rock Duo

JPN Dance Pop 1

Irish Dance

JPN TVSoundtrack

JPN Idol Rock

JPN Dance Pop 2

Irish Hymn

Night Walk

JPN Kids Hero

Cute Techno

Celtic Dance

*1
*2

Dragon Rock

Dance Police

Celtic Dance 3/4

Organ Ballad 1

Miracle Rock

Celtic Christmas

Organ Ballad 2

Pretty Cute

Metronome 2/4

Guitar Ballad

Happy Pop

Metronome 3/4

Pop GuitarBallad

Metronome 4/4

ElecPiano Ballad

Pop Piano Ballad

Sheriff Reggae 1

Sheriff Reggae 2

Caribbean

Zouk

Hoedown 1

Hoedown 2

Bluegrass

ChinaPopBallad 1

ChinaPopBallad 2

China Dance

China Trad 1

China Trad 2

Kung Fu

Ethereal Voices

*1
*1
*2

BALLAD

DANCE
*1

ROCK
01

Simple Rock

Simple Shfl Rock

Hard Rock 1

Hard Rock 2

Tears Rock 1

Tears Rock 2

British Rock

Power Rock

Stadium Rock

ContemporaryRock

Standard Rock

Simple 8BtBallad

Acoustic Rock

SimpleRockBallad

Brit Rock Pop

Acoustic8BtBalad

Funk Pop Rock

METRONOME

Simple Dance Pop

Metronome 6/8

Simple Disco

Metronome 9/8

Ibiza 1

Metronome 12/8

Ibiza 2

Metronome 5/4

Trance Pop

Metronome 7/4

Euro Trance 1

Metronome 8/4

Euro Trance 2

Wood Block 2/4

6/8 Trance 1

Wood Block 3/4

6/8 Trance 2

Wood Block 4/4

Club Dance 1

Wood Block 6/8

Club Dance 2

Wood Block 9/8

Dancefloor

Wood Block 12/8

Techno Party

Wood Block 5/4

80s Dance

Wood Block 7/4

Swing House

Wood Block 8/4

Dirty Pop

Mallorca Party

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

4 Accompaniment
The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental
embellishments when rhythms are used.
To use the accompaniment parts, you’ll need to make appropriate settings in the
Rhythm Condition display.

Select the desired rhythm and press the same button on the panel
again.
The Rhythm Condition display appears.
Rhythm Condition Display

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

4
Turn the desired parts on.
Use the Page buttons to select Page 2 or Page 3, then make settings for each
part.
Pressing one of the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to the desired
accompaniment parts successively alternates between ON and OFF.
Page 2

Page 3

Accompaniment parts

Each rhythm consists of seven parts, and you can visually confirm the On/Off
status for all parts in Page 2 and Page 3 of the Rhythm Condition display. These
parts, with the exception of the Main Drum and Add Drum, are
Accompaniment parts.
The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1,
and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing
corresponding button. If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does
not sound.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Chord 1/Chord 2
These are the rhythmic chord backing parts.

Pad
This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds, such as strings
and organ.

Phrase 1/Phrase 2
These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such
as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.

Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty
depending on the selected rhythm and rhythm section.
Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns.
When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do
not sound.
Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add Drum has
additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine.

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Press the [START] button to start the rhythm, and then play the
Lower Keyboard.

To adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the
Accompaniment:
Make settings in Page 1 of the Rhythm Condition display.

Select the desired rhythm and then press the same rhythm button
on the panel again.
The Rhythm Condition display appears.

Reference Page
Rhythm Condition display
(page 74)

Use the Page buttons to select Page 1.
[Page 1]
Rhythm Condition Display

1
2

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Determine the reverb and volume settings.
1 Accompaniment Volume
Determines the accompaniment volume.
Press the [C] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change
the setting.
Range: 0 – 24

2 Accompaniment Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to accompaniment. When the Reverb Depth
(for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
Press the [D] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change
the setting.
Range: 0 – 24

Reference Page
Accompaniment (page 79)

Reference Page
Reverb Depth (page 61)

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Automatic Accompaniment—Auto Bass

5 Chord (A.B.C.)

The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the
Electone to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an
entirely new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing
band at your disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic
Accompaniment patterns. You can select the desired mode in the A.B.C./M.O.C.
display.

To set the A.B.C. function:

Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears.
A.B.C./M.O.C. Display

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Press the [A] button to select the “ABC MODE,” then select the
desired mode by turning the DATA CONTROL dial.

1 OFF
2 SINGLE FINGER
3 FINGERED CHORD
4 CUSTOM ABC

A.B.C. Mode
You can select modes in sequence: OFF  SINGLE FINGER  FINGERED
CHORD  CUSTOM ABC by turning the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise.
Turning the DATA CONTROL dial counter-clockwise selects in the reverse
order.
When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, set Lower/
Pedal Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower
keyboard or Pedalboard stops the rhythm. For details, see “Memory” on
page 84.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

1 Off
Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.

2 Single Finger

NOTE

You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by simply using one, or at
most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The Single Finger mode provides the
fastest and easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass combinations. The chord
produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower
keyboard.

When the A.B.C. function
mode is set to Single Finger
or Fingered Chord, the bass
part will not sound even if
you play the pedals of the
Pedalboard.

Key of C
C

Major chords:
Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the
chord’s name).
Cm

Minor chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the
left of it.
C7

7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the
left of it.

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Cm7

Minor 7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any
white key to the left of it.
Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous
chords to your performance.

3 Fingered Chord

NOTE

The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords
played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in
the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the
Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you play
only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on the
basis of the previously played chord.

When playing certain chords
(aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and
m6), make sure that the
lowest note you play is the
root of the chord.

Key of C
C

Cm7

Cmaj7

Cm maj7

Caug

Cdim

Cdim7

Csus4

C7sus4

Cm7-5

Cm6

Cadd9

Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous
chords to your performance.

4 Custom A.B.C.
The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode.
It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by
playing notes on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Memory
The Memory function is a convenient performance tool in the A.B.C. features that
makes playing with the accompaniment even smoother and more fluid. It is available
separately for both the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. To use it, turn Memory on,
start the rhythm and play chords and bass notes according to the selected A.B.C.
mode. With Memory on, the accompaniment continues to play, even when you
release your fingers (and foot). When you want to change to the next chord, simply
play it and release it, and the auto accompaniment keeps playing with the new chord
and bass note. This means that you can play a chord/bass note briefly, release it, and
take your time before playing the next—you don’t have to hold a chord down to keep
the accompaniment going.
When A.B.C. is turned off (but Memory is on), the auto accompaniment of the
rhythmic chords and bass pattern do not sound, but the sound of the Lower
keyboard and/or Pedalboard continues until you play the next chord/bass note.

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

1
2

1 Lower Memory
When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep
playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard, while the
rhythm plays.
Successive pressing of the [B] button alternates between ON and OFF.
2 Pedal Memory
When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing
even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm plays.
Successive pressing of the [C] button alternates between ON and OFF.
(In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass
accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your
fingers from the Lower keyboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

6 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)
The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the
melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords
you play on the Lower keyboard—or from the chords that are played for you, if you
use Automatic Accompaniment.

To set the M.O.C. function:

Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears.
A.B.C./M.O.C. Display

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

4
Turn the M.O.C. on.
Successive pressing of the [D] button alternates between ON and OFF.

ON:
Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played.

OFF:
Cancels the Melody On Chord function.

Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s
volume is set to the appropriate value.
Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voice.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Rhythm Sequence
Rhythm Sequence lets you create your own rhythm compositions, connecting together
any of the Electone’s existing rhythms as well as original rhythms created on other
Electones that have the Rhythm Sequence Program function (such as the ELS series).
Although this Electone does not have the full Rhythm Sequence Program function, you
can load four rhythm compositions to Sequence numbers [SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons on
the panel for future recall, using the steps below.
When the rhythm sequence contains Registration Sequence data or Next Unit data, these
data types also can be loaded and played on this Electone.
While a rhythm is playing, sequence data in the Registration data cannot be loaded.

1
2

Insert the USB flash drive that contains the desired rhythm
sequence data into the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
Press the [MDR] button and select the desired Song which
contains the Registration data you want to load back to
Electone.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

This is necessary because the rhythm sequence data is stored as part of the
registration data in the Song (page 147).

Reference Page
What is a Song? (page 134)

Reference Page
Recalling Recorded
Registrations (page 154)

Load back the desired registration.
If the desired registration is in Unit 1, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button in
the MDR section to load back the Unit 1 registrations. If the desired
registration is in a Unit other than 1, specify the Unit number then load
back the Unit.
Now the rhythm sequence data has been loaded to Sequence numbers
[SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Press the desired sequence numbers [SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons
to turn them on (the respective lamps light).
NOTE
Sequence numbers
[SEQ.1]—[SEQ.4] buttons
can be turned on at the
same time.

Press the [START] button in the Rhythm section to play back
the rhythm sequence.
Only those sequences set to on can be played. Two or more rhythm
sequences can be played back in succession in numeric order. The SEQ.
lamp goes out when the sequence assigned to it is finished playing.

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

7 Keyboard Percussion
The Keyboard Percussion function provides many different drum and percussion
sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard. Keyboard Percussion has two
different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset
drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned beforehand to the keys), while the
User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any key or pedal
you wish.

Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion


NOTE
On/Off status of the Voices
(page 31)

4
NOTE

1
2

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Two Keyboard Percussion
sets, [1] and [2], can be
played at the same time by
setting both buttons to on.

Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each
Voice’s volume to MIN.
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
Keyboard Percussion [1] or [2] button. Press the [1] button to play
Percussion sounds on the Upper/Lower keyboards, and press the
[2] button for the Pedalboard.
The Keyboard Percussion (KBP) display appears.
KBP Display

Pressing the Keyboard Percussion [1] button calls up the Preset 1 kit on the
Upper/Lower keyboards, and pressing [2] button calls up the Preset 2 kit on the
Pedalboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Select the desired percussion kit.
You can select a kit from a total of 22 different kits.
Press the [B] button to select “KIT,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
select the kit.

Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard.
For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the “Preset Keyboard
Percussion List” on page 90.

Changing the Keyboard Percussion volume/reverb

Reference Page
Recalling the User Keyboard
Percussion (page 104)

NOTE
The Keyboard Percussion
volume and reverb settings
made here are commonly
applied to both Keyboard
Percussion 1 and 2.

1
2

1 Volume
Determines the Keyboard Percussion volume.
Press the [C] button to select “VOLUME,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

2 Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion.
When the Reverb depth (for entire instrument) is set to the minimum, the setting
here will have no effect.
Press the [D] button to select “REVERB,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
change the setting.
Range: 0 – 24

4
Reference Page
Reverb Depth (page 61)

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Preset Keyboard Percussion List


Indicates the drum/percussion sounds and their key assignments.
Preset 1 (UK)

Bass Drum
Gran Cassa
Tom 2
Tom 1
Snare
Snare Roll
Hi-Hat Closed
Cymbal
Hi-Hat Open
Tambourine
Finger Snap
Castanet
Triangle Mute
Wood Block L
Triangle Open
Wood Block H
Hand Clap
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Alarm Bell
Train
Horn 1
Horn 2
Siren
CarEngn Ignition
Car Crash
Helicopter
Starship
Sheep
Goat
Oxen
Whinny
Horse
Lion
Dog
Cat
Hen
Owl
Insects
Frog
Tweet 1
Tweet 2
Cuckoo Clock
Big Clock
Bell
Telephone
Camera
Gnaw
Applause

Wonderland Kit
Preset 1 (LK)

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Laser Beam
Laser Shot
Water Phone
Bubble
Puddle
Thunder
Shower
Beach
Stream
Footstep
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Bass Drum
Gran Cassa
Tom 2
Tom 1
Snare
Snare Roll
Hi-Hat Closed
Cymbal
Hi-Hat Open
Tambourine
Finger Snap
Castanet
Triangle Mute
Wood Block L
Triangle Open
Wood Block H
Hand Clap
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Alarm Bell
Train
Horn 1
Horn 2
Siren
CarEngn Ignition
Car Crash
Helicopter
Starship
Sheep
Goat
Oxen
Whinny
Horse
Lion
Dog
Cat
Hen

Preset 2 (PK)
Thunder
Horse
Bass Drum
Footstep
Snare
Snare Roll
Footstep
Lion
Footstep
Oxen
Footstep
Door Slam
Big Clock
Footstep
Starship
Footstep
Train
Car Crash
Footstep
Puddle

: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Preset 1 (UK)

EL Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
–
–
Claves

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
Synth Tom 3
Concert BD
Synth Tom 2
Bass Drum Heavy
Synth Tom 1
Bass Drum Light
Snare Drum Heavy
SD Brush Roll
Snare Drum Heavy
SD Brush Shot 1
SD Reverb 1
Snare Drum Light
Tom 3
Snare Drum Rim 1
Tom 2
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom 1
Hi-Hat Open
Ride Cymbal 1
Orch Snare Drum
Crash Cymbal 1
Snare Drum Roll
Orchestra Cymbal
Orch Cymbal Roll
Triangle Mute
Tambourine
Triangle Open
Castanet
Cowbell 1
Timbale 1 Low
Timbale 1 High
Wood Block Low
Conga Low
Wood Block High
Conga High
Bongo Low
Agogo Low
Bongo High
Agogo High
Cuica Low
Hand Claps
Cuica High
Shaker

Preset 2 (PK)
Bass Drum Heavy
SD Brush Roll
Snare Drum Heavy
SD Brush Shot 1
SD Reverb 1
Snare Drum Light
Tom 3
Snare Drum Rim 1
Tom 2
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom 1
Hi-Hat Open
Ride Cymbal 1
Synth Tom 3
Crash Cymbal 1
Synth Tom 2
Orchestra Cymbal
–
Synth Tom 1
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Standard Kit 1
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick
Side Stick
Snare
Hand Clap
Snare Tight
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Kick
Side Stick
Snare
Hand Clap
Snare Tight
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal

Preset 1 (UK)

Standard Kit 2
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft 2
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot H
Kick Tight
Kick Short
Side Stick Light
Snare Short
Hand Clap
Snare Tight H
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Short
Side Stick Light
Snare Short
Hand Clap
Snare Tight H
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Preset 1 (UK)

: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Preset 1 (UK)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Hit Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Electro
Sticks
Kick Tight L
Snare Pitched
Kick Wet
Kick Tight H
Stick Ambient
Snare Ambient
Hand Clap
Snare Tight 2
Hybrid Tom 1
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hybrid Tom 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Hybrid Tom 3
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Hybrid Tom 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine Light
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Tight H
Stick Ambient
Snare Ambient
Hand Clap
Snare Tight 2
Hybrid Tom 1
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hybrid Tom 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Hybrid Tom 3
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Hybrid Tom 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine Light
Splash Cymbal

: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Preset 1 (UK)

Room Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick
Side Stick
Snare Snappy
Hand Clap
Snare Tight Snap
Tom Room 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Room 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Room 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Room 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Kick
Side Stick
Snare Snappy
Hand Clap
Snare Tight Snap
Tom Room 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Room 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Room 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Room 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal

Rock Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Noisy
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick 2
Kick Gate
Side Stick
Snare Rock
Hand Clap
Snare Rock Tight
Tom Rock 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Rock 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Rock 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Rock 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Gate
Side Stick
Snare Rock
Hand Clap
Snare Rock Tight
Tom Rock 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Rock 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Rock 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Rock 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal

Preset 1 (UK)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Electro Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Reverse Cymbal
Snare Roll
Hi Q 2
Snare Snap Elec
Sticks
Kick 3
Open Rim Shot
Kick Gate
Kick Gate Heavy
Side Stick
Snare Noisy 2
Hand Clap
Snare Noisy 3
Tom Electro 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Electro 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Electro 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Electro 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Gate Heavy
Side Stick
Snare Noisy 2
Hand Clap
Snare Noisy 3
Tom Electro 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Electro 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Electro 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Electro 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Preset 1 (UK)

: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Preset 1 (UK)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga Analog H
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas 2
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves 2
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Analog Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Reverse Cymbal
Snare Roll
Hi Q 2
Snare Noisy 4
Sticks
Kick 3
Open Rim Shot
Kick Anlg Short
Kick Analog
Side Stick Anlg
Snare Analog
Hand Clap
Snare Analog 2
Tom Analog 1
Hat Close Analog
Tom Analog 2
Hat Close Anlg 2
Tom Analog 3
Hat Open Analog
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Crash Analog
Tom Analog 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Analog
Side Stick Anlg
Snare Analog
Hand Clap
Snare Analog 2
Tom Analog 1
Hat Close Analog
Tom Analog 2
Hat Close Anlg 2
Tom Analog 3
Hat Open Analog
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Crash Analog
Tom Analog 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal

: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Preset 1 (UK)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bongo Analog H
Bongo Analog L
Conga Analog H
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas 2
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves 2
Dance Perc 3
Dance Perc 4
Dance Breath 1
Dance Breath 2
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Dance Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Kick Dance 1
Kick Dance 2
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch Dance 1
Scratch Dance 2
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Dance Perc 1
Reverse Dance 1
Dance Perc 2
Hi Q Dance 1
Snare Analog 3
Vinyl Noise
Snare Analog 4
Reverse Cymbal
Reverse Dance 2
Hi Q 2
Snare Techno
Snare Dance 1
Kick Techno Q
Rim Gate
Kick Techno L
Kick Techno
Side Stick Anlg
Snare Clap
Dance Clap
Snare Dry
Tom Dance 1
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Tom Dance 2
Hat Close Anlg 3
Tom Dance 3
Hi-Hat Open 3
Tom Dance 4
Tom Dance 5
Crash Analog
Tom Dance 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine Anlg
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell Dance
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap Analog
Ride Analog
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Techno
Side Stick Anlg
Snare Clap
Dance Clap
Snare Dry
Tom Dance 1
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Tom Dance 2
Hat Close Anlg 3
Tom Dance 3
Hi-Hat Open 3
Tom Dance 4
Tom Dance 5
Crash Analog
Tom Dance 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine Anlg
Splash Cymbal

Jazz Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Jazz H
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick Jazz
Side Stick Light
Snare Jazz L
Hand Clap
Snare Jazz M
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Jazz
Side Stick Light
Snare Jazz L
Hand Clap
Snare Jazz M
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal

Preset 1 (UK)

Brush Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Brush Slap 2
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick Jazz
Side Stick Light
Brush Slap 3
Hand Clap
Brush Tap 2
Tom Brush 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Brush 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Brush 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Brush 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Jazz
Side Stick Light
Brush Slap 3
Hand Clap
Brush Tap 2
Tom Brush 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Brush 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Brush 3
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Brush 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Preset 1 (UK)

: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Preset 1 (UK)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Symphony Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft 2
Open Rim Shot
Gran Cassa
Gran Cassa Mute
Side Stick
Band Snare
Hand Clap
Band Snare 2
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Hand Cymbal
High Tom
Hand Cymbal S
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Hand Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Hand Cymbal 2 S
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Gran Cassa Mute
Side Stick
Band Snare
Hand Clap
Band Snare 2
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Hand Cymbal
High Tom
Hand Cymbal S
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal

: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Preset 1 (UK)

Live! Studio Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Studio 2
Sticks
Kick Ambience H
Open Rim Shot
Kick Ambience L
Kick Studio
Side Stick
Snare Studio M
Hand Clap
Snare Studio L
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Studio
Side Stick
Snare Studio M
Hand Clap
Snare Studio L
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal

House Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bongo H Open 1 F
Bongo L Open 3 F
Conga H Tip
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Open 2
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas Slur 2
Vox Drum L
Vox Drum H
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica H
Cuica L
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Analog Shaker
Sleigh Bells
Wind Chime
Snare Break Roll
Noise Burst
Vox Bell
Snare R&B 1
Vox Alk
Udu High
Filter Kick
–
–
–
–
–

W Kick
Disco Fx
WhiteNoiseDown 1
PinkNoise Down 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
PinkNoise Down 2
White Noise Up 2
White Noise Up 1
Pink Noise Up
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
PinkNoise Up Rel
Kick T9 4
Snare T8 Rim
Snare T8 5
Hand Clap
Snare Garg L
Snare Roll
Snare T9 3
Snare T8 1
Snare T9 5
Kick T9 1
Snare T9 Gate
Kick T9 2
Kick T9 5
Snare T9 Rim
Snare T9 1
Clap T9
Snare T9 2
Tom T9 1
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Tom T9 2
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
Tom T9 3
Hi-Hat Open T9
Tom T9 4
Tom T9 5
Crash Cymbal T9
Tom T9 6
Ride Cymbal T9
Crash Cymbal 4
RideCymbal Cup 2
Tambourine Hit
Splash Cymbal 2
Cowbell 1
Crash Cymbal 1
Cowbell T8
Ride Cymbal 3
–

Preset 2 (PK)

Preset 1 (UK)

Kick T9 5
Snare T9 Rim
Snare T9 1
Clap T9
Snare T9 2
Tom T9 1
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Tom T9 2
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
Tom T9 3
Hi-Hat Open T9
Tom T9 4
Tom T9 5
Crash Cymbal T9
Tom T9 6
Ride Cymbal T9
Crash Cymbal 4
RideCymbal Cup 2
Tambourine Hit
Splash Cymbal 2

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet

SFX Kit 1
Preset 1 (LK)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Cutting Noise 1
Cutting Noise 2
–
String Slap
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Flute Key Click
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Cutting Noise 1
Cutting Noise 2
–
String Slap
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Flute Key Click
–
–
–

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Preset 1 (UK)

–
–
–
Ghost
Maou
–
–
–
–
–

: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Preset 1 (UK)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Phone Call
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch Split
Wind Chime
Telephone Ring
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CarEngn Ignition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

SFX Kit 2
Preset 1 (LK)

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
–
–
–
–
–
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Foot Steps
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Phone Call
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch Split
Wind Chime
Telephone Ring
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CarEngn Ignition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash

: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Preset 1 (UK)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Noise Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
White Noise
Pink Noise
WhiteNoiseDown 1
PinkNoise Down 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
PinkNoise Down 2
White Noise Up 2
White Noise Up 1
Pink Noise Up
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
PinkNoise Up Rel
WhiteNoiseUp LFO
PinkNoise Up LFO
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Preset 2 (PK)
White Noise
Pink Noise
WhiteNoiseDown 1
PinkNoise Down 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
PinkNoise Down 2
White Noise Up 2
White Noise Up 1
Pink Noise Up
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
PinkNoise Up Rel
WhiteNoiseUp LFO
PinkNoise Up LFO
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Pop Latin Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Cowbell Top
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
MetalGuiro Short
Metal Guiro Long
Tambourine
Tambourim Open
Tambourim Mute
Tambourim Tip
Maracas
Shaker
Cabasa
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cowbell High 1
Cowbell High 2
Shekere
Shekere Tone
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
–
Wind Chime
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Cajon Low
Cajon Slap
Cajon Tip
Claves High
Claves Low
Hand Clap
–
Finger Snap
Castanet
Conga H Tip
Conga H Heel
Conga H Open
Conga H Mute
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Slap
Conga H SlapMute
Conga L Tip
Conga L Heel
Conga L Open
Conga L Mute
Conga L SlapOpen
Conga L Slap
Conga L Slide
Bongo H Open 1 f
Bongo H Open 3 f
Bongo H Rim
Bongo H Tip
Bongo H Heel
Bongo H Slap
Bongo L Open 1 f
Bongo L Open 3 f
Bongo L Rim
Bongo L Tip
Bongo L Heel
Bongo L Slap
Timbale L
–
–
–
–
Paila L
Timbale H
–
–
–
–
Paila H
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Bongo H Open 1 f
Bongo H Open 3 f
Bongo H Rim
Bongo H Tip
Bongo H Heel
Bongo H Slap
Bongo L Open 1 f
Bongo L Open 3 f
Bongo L Rim
Bongo L Tip
Bongo L Heel
Bongo L Slap
Timbale L
–
–
–
–
Paila L
Timbale H
–

Preset 1 (UK)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Katem Dom
Katem Tak
Katem Sak
Katem Tak
Doff Tak
Tabla Dom
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tik
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Sak
Tabla Roll Edge
Tabla Flam
Sagat 1
Tabel Dom
Sagat 3
Tabel Tak
Sagat 2
Rik Dom
Rik Tak 2
Rik Finger 1
Rik Tak 1
Rik Finger 2
Rik BrassTremolo
Rik Sak
Rik Tik
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Arabic Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Nakarazan Dom
Cabasa
Nakarazan Edge
Hager Dom
Hager Edge
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Zagrouda H
Zagrouda L
Kick Soft
Side Stick
Snare Soft
Arabic Hand Clap
Snare Drum
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Duhulla Dom
Tambourine
Duhulla Tak
Cowbell
Duhulla Sak
Claves
Doff Dom
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Soft
Side Stick
Snare Soft
Arabic Hand Clap
Snare Drum
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Duhulla Dom
Tambourine
Duhulla Tak

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Preset 1 (UK)

: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Preset 1 (UK)

China Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Ban
Bangu Roll
ChineseOperaVo 1
ChineseOperaVo 2
ChineseOperaVo 3
Yunluo F
Yunluo F#
Yunluo G
Yunluo G#
Yunluo A
Yunluo A#
Yunluo B
Yunluo C
Yunluo C#
Yunluo D
Yunluo D#
Yunluo E
Yunluo High F
Yunluo High F#
Yunluo High G
Yunluo High G#
Yunluo High A
Yunluo High A#
Yunluo High B
Yunluo High C
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Da Cha 2
Da Gu mp
Da Gu Rim
Da Gu f
Da Gu Hand
Da Gu Roll
Pai Gu 4
Pai Gu 4 High
Pai Gu 3
Pai Gu 3 High
Pai Gu 2
Pai Gu 2 High
Pai Gu 1
Luo High 1
Gong Batter
Jin Luo
Luo High 2
Luo Mid-Low
Luo
Jin Luo Low
Da Cha 1
Da Cha Effect
Zhongcha
Xiaocha Effect
Xiaocha
Mang Luo Low
Mang Luo Mid
Qing
Finger Bell
Luo Big
Muyu Low
Muyu Mid-Low
Muyu Mid
Muyu High
Nanbangzi Roll
Nanbangzi
Bangu
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Luo High 1
Gong Batter
Jin Luo
Luo High 2
Luo Mid-Low
Luo
Jin Luo Low
Da Cha 1
Da Cha Effect
Zhongcha
Xiaocha Effect
Xiaocha
Mang Luo Low
Mang Luo Mid
Qing
Finger Bell
Luo Big
Muyu Low
Muyu Mid-Low
Muyu Mid

: Indicates the keys of the keyboard.

100

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Preset 1 (UK)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Bongo H Stick
Bongo L Stick
Conga H Stick
Conga L Stick
Whip
Rotating Tom 5
Tubular Bell L
Rotating Tom 4
Tubular Bell M
Rotating Tom 3
Tubular Bell H
Rotating Tom 2
Rotating Tom 1
Temple Block H
Temple Block L
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Anveil
Triangle Roll
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Bell Tree
Sleigh Bells
Wind Chime
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Orchestra Perc
Preset 1 (LK)
–
Symphonic Gong 1
Symphonic Gong L
Symphonic Gong 2
Timpani E
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani C
Timpani C#
Timpani D
Timpani D#
Timpani High E
Gran Cassa Hard
Gran Cassa Soft
Gran Cassa Hit
Gran Cassa Cresc
ConcertSnareDrum
Snare Roll
Snare Drum Light
Snare Ensemble
Sus Cym 1 Roll S
Sus Cymbal 1
Sus Cym 2 Roll L
Sus Cymbal 2
Concert Tom 5
OrchCymbal 1 ckd
Concert Tom 4
Orch Cymbal 1
Concert Tom 3
Orch Cymbal 2
Concert Tom 2
Concert Tom 1
Finger Cymbal
Gong
Ride Cymbal Tip
China Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Jingle Ring
Castanet Roll
Table Castanet
–

Preset 2 (PK)
Snare Ensemble
Sus Cym 1 Roll S
Sus Cymbal 1
Sus Cym 2 Roll L
Sus Cymbal 2
Concert Tom 5
OrchCymbal 1 ckd
Concert Tom 4
Orch Cymbal 1
Concert Tom 3
Orch Cymbal 2
Concert Tom 2
Concert Tom 1
Finger Cymbal
Gong
Ride Cymbal Tip
China Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal

Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion


You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and
your original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User
40. The User setting saved in the User memory location can be called up by using the
Keyboard Percussion [1] or [2] buttons.
In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with
Keyboard Percussion [1] button.

NOTE
By default, the same data as
the Preset 1 – 2 of the EL Kit
is stored to User Keyboard
Percussion 1 and 2.

Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
Keyboard Percussion [1] button.
The KBP display appears.
KBP Display

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

4
Select “User 1” here.
Press the [A] button to select “User 1.” If another name is shown, select “User 1”
with the DATA CONTROL dial.

This step assigns “User 1” to the Keyboard Percussion [1] button. You can call
up “User 1” the next time you press the [1] button.

Select the desired percussion kit.
Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
select the kit. Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 105.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

101

Use the Page buttons to select the ASSIGN Page.
In this Page, you can assign specific drum sounds to any of the keys.

1
2
3
4

1 Category
This allows you to select the desired percussion category using the [A] buttons.
Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 105.

2 Instrument Names
The individual instruments are shown in the display and can be selected with the [B]
button.
Refer to the “Kit Assign List” on page 105.

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

3 Assign
Assigns the selected instrument to the desired key. (See the following explanation in
step 7.)

4 Clear
This function is used to erase the User assignment for User 1. Clear works in two ways:
either to erase a single instrument, or to erase all instruments. (See the following
explanation on page 103.)

102

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Select the desired percussion group.
Press the [A] button to select “CATEGORY,” then use the DATA CONTROL
dial to select the category.

Select the desired instruments.
Press the [B] button to select “INST.” (Instrument), then use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the desired instrument.

To assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal.
Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button [C] corresponding to
“ASS.”(Assign) and press the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is to be
assigned. The currently displayed instrument will be assigned to the key you
press down as a part of User 1.

7-1.

7-2.

While holding down
[C] button...

NOTE
Though 40 User Keyboard
Percussion setups can be
created, they cannot be
memorized to Registration
Memory. Only on/off data
and the Keyboard
Percussion Menu are
memorized to Registration
Memory. If you want to save
the User Keyboard
Percussion setups with the
Registration Memory, save
the data to the USB flash
drive (page 147). 40 User
Keyboard Percussion setups
will be saved to each Unit.

Press the key.

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

When the assignment is complete, the key name and instrument name is
displayed at the bottom of the display. The assignments are saved to the User
memory selected in step 2 (in this example, User 1).

Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your
own User Keyboard Percussion set.

To erase one instrument:
Simultaneously hold down the [D] button corresponding to “CLR.”(Clear) in the
display and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to
erase.
(A short ‘beep’ sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.)

NOTICE
The Keyboard Percussion
on/off data and Menu is
automatically saved to
Registration Memory when
another display is called
up. Make sure to switch to
another display before
turning the power off. A “”
mark appears at the top left
of the display indicating
that the Registration data
is currently being saved.
Do not turn the power off
while the Registration is
being saved, otherwise the
data will be lost.

While holding down
[D] button...

Press the key.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

103

To erase all instruments:
You can clear all assignments in ASSIGN Page of the Keyboard Percussion display.

Press, then release the [D] “CLR.” (CLEAR) button in the display.

The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. You
can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] button corresponding
to “CANCEL.”

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Press the [C] “CLR.” (Clear) button to erase all data. When the [C]
button is pressed, an “Assignments of User xx have been cleared”
message momentarily appears on the display.

Recalling the User Keyboard Percussion


104

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Press the Keyboard Percussion button.

Select the desired User Keyboard percussion kit.
Press the [A] button to select “MENU,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
select the desired User number.
Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard.

Kit Assign List


CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cym Mute
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Orchestra Cymbal
Orch Cymbal Roll
Orch Cymbal Mute
Cymbal March
Cym Brush Shot
Tam-Tam

HI-HAT
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal 1
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Analog HH Open
Analog HH Closed

SNARE DRUM
Snare Drum Light
Snare Drum Heavy
Snare Drum Rim 1
Snare Drum Rim 2
SD Accent 1
SD Accent 2
SD Reverb 1
SD Reverb 2
Synth Snare Drum
Orch Snare Drum
Snare Drum Roll
Analog SD

SNARE BRUSH
SD Brush Shot 1
SD Brush Shot 2
SD Brush Roll

TOM
Tom 1
Tom 2
Tom 3
Tom 4
Tom Brush Shot 1
Tom Brush Shot 2
Tom Brush Shot 3
Tom Brush Shot 4
Synth Tom 1
Synth Tom 2
Synth Tom 3

BASS DRUM
Bass Drum Light
Bass Drum Heavy
Bass Drum Attack
Synth Bass Drum
Bass Drum March
Concert BD
Analog BD Short
Analog BD Long

CONGA/BONGO
Conga High
Conga Low
Conga Slap
Conga Muff
Conga Slide
Bongo High

Bongo Low
Bongo Slap
Bongo Mute

CUICA/SURDO
Cuica High
Cuica Middle
Cuica Low
Tamborim Open
Tamborim Mute
Surdo Open
Surdo Mute
Surdo Rim
Surdo Muff

TIMBALES/COWBELL
Timbale 1 High
Timbale 1 Low
Timbale 2 High
Timbale 2 Low
Timbale 3 High
Timbale 3 Low
Timbale 4 High
Timbale 4 Low
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell 4

PERCUSSION 1
Cabasa
Shaker
Maracas High
Maracas Low
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Wood Block High
Wood Block Mid
Wood Block Low
Claves
Castanet
Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2
Agogo High
Agogo Low
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wind Chime Down
Wind Chime Up
Tambourine
Pandeiro
Bells
Hand Claps
Finger Snap
Scratch
Noise Percussion

PERCUSSION 3
Kotsuzumi 1
Kotsuzumi 2
Kotsuzumi 3
Kotsuzumi 4
Ohtsuzumi 1
Ohtsuzumi 2
Taiko 1
Taiko 2
Ohdaiko 1
Ohdaiko 2
Kakegoe 1
Kakegoe 2
Kakegoe 3

Standard Kit 1
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM
Snare
Snare Tight
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl

TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom

BASS DRUM
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute

Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell

Standard Kit 2
CYMBAL

Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

EL Kit

SNARE DRUM
Snare Short
Snare Tight H
Snare Soft 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot H
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl

TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom

BASS DRUM
Kick Short
Kick Tight
Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

105

Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap

TOM

Hi-Hat Pedal

Tom Room 1
Tom Room 2
Tom Room 3
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Tom Room 6

SNARE DRUM

Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 2

PERCUSSION 4

Tambourine Light
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap

Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell

Hit Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2

Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

TOM
Hybrid Tom 1
Hybrid Tom 2
Hybrid Tom 3
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5
Hybrid Tom 6

BASS DRUM
Kick Tight H
Kick Wet
Kick Tight L

PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open

106

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1

PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L

TOM
Tom Rock 1
Tom Rock 2
Tom Rock 3
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Tom Rock 6

BASS DRUM
Kick Gate
Kick 2
Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 4

PERCUSSION 3

Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell

Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 2

CYMBAL

PERCUSSION 4

Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal

Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell

SNARE DRUM

Rock Kit

Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap

Room Kit

SNARE DRUM
Snare Ambient
Snare Tight 2
Snare Electro
Snare Roll
Stick Ambient
Snare Pitched
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl

BASS DRUM

Snare Rock
Snare Rock Tight
Snare Noisy
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl

Snare Snappy
Snare Tight Snap
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl

Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

PERCUSSION 4
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed

Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell

CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal

Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 3

Vibraslap Analog

PERCUSSION 4

Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 2

PERCUSSION 4

Tambourine Anlg
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Dance Perc 3
Dance Perc 4
Snare Dance 1
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Dance Clap

Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell

Analog Kit

SNARE DRUM
Snare Noisy 2
Snare Noisy 3
Snare Snap Elec
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal

TOM
Tom Electro 1
Tom Electro 2
Tom Electro 3
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Tom Electro 6

BASS DRUM
Kick Gate Heavy
Kick Gate
Kick 3

PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap

CYMBAL
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hat Open Analog
Hat Close Analog
Hat Close Anlg 2

Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell

Dance Kit

TOM
Tom Analog 1
Tom Analog 2
Tom Analog 3
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Tom Analog 6

BASS DRUM
Kick Analog
Kick Anlg Short
Kick 3

PERCUSSION 1
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog H
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Analog
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

PERCUSSION 4

SNARE DRUM
Snare Analog
Snare Analog 2
Snare Noisy 4
Snare Roll
Side Stick Anlg
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal

Kick Dance 1
Kick Dance 2
Dance Breath 1
Dance Breath 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L

CYMBAL
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Analog
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 3
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Hat Close Anlg 3

Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch Dance 1
Scratch Dance 2
Dance Perc 2
Hi Q Dance 1
Dance Perc 1
Reverse Dance 1

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Electro Kit

Jazz Kit

SNARE DRUM
Snare Clap
Snare Dry
Snare Techno
Reverse Dance 2
Side Stick Anlg
Rim Gate
Snare Analog 3
Snare Analog 4
Vinyl Noise
Reverse Cymbal

TOM
Tom Dance 1
Tom Dance 2
Tom Dance 3
Tom Dance 4
Tom Dance 5
Tom Dance 6

BASS DRUM
Kick Techno
Kick Techno L
Kick Techno Q

PERCUSSION 1
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog H
Bongo Analog H
Bongo Analog L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Dance
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2

CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal

SNARE DRUM
Snare Jazz L
Snare Jazz M
Snare Jazz H
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl

TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom

BASS DRUM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

107

PERCUSSION 1

Brush Tap Swirl

Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap

TOM

PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3

Tom Brush 1
Tom Brush 2
Tom Brush 3
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Tom Brush 6

BASS DRUM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft

PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap

Live!StudioKit

SNARE DRUM

CYMBAL

Band Snare
Band Snare 2
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl

TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

PERCUSSION 1

TOM

Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap

Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom

PERCUSSION 4

Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap

PERCUSSION 2

PERCUSSION 4

Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap

Brush Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal

PERCUSSION 3

Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell

Symphony Kit

Brush Slap 3
Brush Tap 2
Brush Slap 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

CYMBAL
Hand Cymbal
Hand Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Hand Cymbal S
Hand Cymbal 2 S
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open

BASS DRUM
Kick Studio
Kick Ambience L
Kick Ambience H

PERCUSSION 1

Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L

Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap

PERCUSSION 3

PERCUSSION 2

PERCUSSION 4

SNARE DRUM

Gran Cassa Mute
Gran Cassa
Kick Soft 2

BASS DRUM

PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L

Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Snare Studio M
Snare Studio L
Snare Studio 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl

Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell

108

Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal

Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell

Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L

PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap

PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell

House Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal T9
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 4
Splash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal T9
Ride Cymbal 3
RideCymbal Cup 2
Hi-Hat Open T9
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Hi-Hat Pedal T9

SNARE DRUM
Snare T9 1
Snare T9 2
Snare T9 3
Snare T9 5
Snare T9 Gate
Snare T9 Rim
Snare T8 1
Snare T8 5
Snare T8 Rim
Snare Garg L
Snare R&B 1
Snare Roll
Snare Break Roll

TOM
Tom T9 1
Tom T9 2
Tom T9 3
Tom T9 4
Tom T9 5
Tom T9 6

BASS DRUM
Kick T9 1
Kick T9 2
Kick T9 4
Kick T9 5
W Kick
Filter Kick

Timbale L
Cowbell 1
Cowbell T8
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas Slur 2

PERCUSSION 2
Cuica H
Cuica L
Cabasa
Agogo H
Agogo L
Analog Shaker
Udu High

NOISE

Tambourine Hit
Sleigh Bells
Wind Chime
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Clap T9
Hand Clap
Vox Drum H
Vox Drum L
Vox Alk
Vox Bell

White Noise
WhiteNoiseDown 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
White Noise Up 1
White Noise Up 2
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
WhiteNoiseUp LFO
Pink Noise
PinkNoise Down 1
PinkNoise Down 2
Pink Noise Up
PinkNoise Up Rel
PinkNoise Up LFO

SFX Kit 1

Wonderland Kit

SFX

Cutting Noise 1
Cutting Noise 2
String Slap
Flute Key Click
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Ghost
Maou
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet

Laser Beam
Laser Shot
Water Phone
Bubble
Puddle

SFX Kit 2
SFX 1

PinkNoise Down 1
PinkNoise Down 2
Pink Noise Up
PinkNoise Up Rel
WhiteNoiseDown 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
White Noise Up 1
White Noise Up 2
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
Noise Burst
Disco Fx

Phone Call
Telephone Ring
Wind Chime
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch Split
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Foot Steps

Conga H Open 2
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Tip
Bongo H Open 1 F
Bongo L Open 3 F
Timbale H

Noise Kit

PERCUSSION 3

NOISE

PERCUSSION 1

Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework

SFX 2
CarEngn Ignition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash

NATURE
Thunder
Shower
Beach
Stream

DAILY
Footstep
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Alarm Bell
Cuckoo Clock
Big Clock
Bell
Telephone
Camera
Gnaw
Applause

VEHICLE
Train
Horn 1
Horn 2
Siren
CarEngn Ignition
Car Crash
Helicopter
Starship

ANIMAL
Sheep
Goat
Oxen
Whinny
Horse

Lion
Dog
Cat
Hen
Owl
Insects
Frog
Tweet 1
Tweet 2

PERCUSSION 1
Cymbal
Snare
Snare Roll
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom 1
Tom 2
Bass Drum
Gran Cassa

PERCUSSION 2
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Finger Snap
Hand Clap

4
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Hand Clap

Pop Latin Kit
CONGA
Conga H Tip
Conga H Heel
Conga H Open
Conga H Mute
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Slap
Conga H SlapMute
Conga L Tip
Conga L Heel
Conga L Open
Conga L Mute
Conga L SlapOpen
Conga L Slap
Conga L Slide

BONGO
Bongo H Open 1 f
Bongo H Open 3 f
Bongo H Rim
Bongo H Tip
Bongo H Heel
Bongo H Slap
Bongo L Open 1 f
Bongo L Open 3 f
Bongo L Rim
Bongo L Tip
Bongo L Heel
Bongo L Slap

PERCUSSION 1
Timbale H
Timbale L
Paila H
Paila L
Cowbell Top
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell High 1

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

109

Cowbell High 2
Claves High
Claves Low
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Metal Guiro Long
MetalGuiro Short

PERCUSSION 2
Maracas
Cuica Open
Cuica Mute
Cabasa
Shaker
Tambourine
Tambourim Tip
Tambourim Open
Tambourim Mute
Castanet
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wind Chime

PERCUSSION 3
Hand Clap
Finger Snap
Shekere
Shekere Tone
Cajon Low
Cajon Slap
Cajon Tip

CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 1
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Snare Drum
Snare Soft
Side Stick

TOM/BASS DRUM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
Kick Soft

PERCUSSION
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Cowbell
Claves
Cabasa
Tambourine

Yunluo D
Yunluo D#
Yunluo E
Yunluo High F
Yunluo High F#
Yunluo High G
Yunluo High G#

Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion

Yunluo High A
Yunluo High A#
Yunluo High B
Yunluo High C

Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani C
Timpani C#
Timpani D
Timpani D#
Timpani High E

PERCUSSION

PERCUSSION 1

Muyu Low
Muyu Mid-Low
Muyu Mid
Muyu High
Ban
Bangu
Bangu Roll
Nanbangzi
Nanbangzi Roll
Qing
Finger Bell
ChineseOperaVo 1
ChineseOperaVo 2
ChineseOperaVo 3

Conga H Stick
Conga L Stick
Bongo H Stick
Bongo L Stick
Cowbell
Claves
Bell Tree
Sleigh Bells
Tubular Bell H
Tubular Bell M
Tubular Bell L
Wind Chime
Jingle Ring
Tambourine
Castanet Roll
Table Castanet

OrchestraPerc

PERCUSSION 2

GONG 2

China Kit
Arabic Kit

CYMBAL
CYMBAL

ARABIC 1
Nakarazan Dom
Nakarazan Edge
Hager Dom
Hager Edge
Zagrouda H
Zagrouda L
Arabic Hand Clap
Duhulla Dom
Duhulla Tak
Duhulla Sak
Doff Dom
Doff Tak

ARABIC 2
Katem Dom
Katem Tak
Katem Sak
Tabla Dom
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Sak
Tabla Tik
Tabla Roll Edge
Tabla Flam
Tabel Dom
Tabel Tak

ARABIC 3
Sagat 1
Sagat 2
Sagat 3
Rik Dom
Rik Tak 1
Rik Tak 2
Rik Sak
Rik Tik
Rik Finger 1
Rik Finger 2
Rik BrassTremolo

110

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Da Cha 1
Da Cha 2
Da Cha Effect
Zhongcha
Xiaocha
Xiaocha Effect
Gong Batter
Luo Big
Luo
Luo Mid-Low
Luo High 1
Luo High 2
Jin Luo
Jin Luo Low
Mang Luo Low
Mang Luo Mid

China Cymbal
Finger Cymbal
Orch Cymbal 1
OrchCymbal 1 ckd
Orch Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Tip
Ride Cymbal Cup
Splash Cymbal
Sus Cymbal 1
Sus Cym 1 Roll S
Sus Cymbal 2
Sus Cym 2 Roll L

SNARE DRUM
ConcertSnareDrum
Snare Drum Light
Snare Ensemble
Snare Roll

DRUM

TOM

Da Gu f
Da Gu mp
Da Gu Rim
Da Gu Roll
Da Gu Hand
Pai Gu 1
Pai Gu 2 High
Pai Gu 2
Pai Gu 3 High
Pai Gu 3
Pai Gu 4 High
Pai Gu 4

Concert Tom 1
Concert Tom 2
Concert Tom 3
Concert Tom 4
Concert Tom 5
Rotating Tom 1
Rotating Tom 2
Rotating Tom 3
Rotating Tom 4
Rotating Tom 5

GONG 1
Yunluo F
Yunluo F#
Yunluo G
Yunluo G#
Yunluo A
Yunluo A#
Yunluo B
Yunluo C
Yunluo C#

BASS DRUM
Gran Cassa Hard
Gran Cassa Soft
Gran Cassa Hit
Gran Cassa Cresc

GONG
Gong
Symphonic Gong 1
Symphonic Gong 2
Symphonic Gong L

TIMPANI
Timpani E

Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Roll
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Temple Block H
Temple Block L
Anveil
Whip

5 Registration Memory
Registration Memory is a powerful performance tool that helps you sound like a professional
player. It lets you store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, conveniently
allowing you to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you’re playing—simply by
pressing a single Registration Memory button. The buttons are conveniently located at the top
right on the panel for easy access while playing. Just press the numbered button that
corresponds to the Registration you wish to select.
Moreover, for even greater convenience, you can also recall the settings using the right
footswitch. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to USB flash drive.

1 Storing Registrations
Newly created Registrations you’ve made can be stored to the Registration Memory
panel buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to USB
flash drive.

1
2

Reference Page
• Selecting a Rhythm
(page 68)

Create your original Registration by making all desired panel
settings.
While holding down the [MEMORY] button in the Registration
Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish to
save your Registration.

• Selecting a Voice
(page 33)
• Voice Controls and Effects
(page 52)

NOTE
By default, Bank A is called
up to the panel Registration
buttons. Thus, your
registration is stored to Bank
A. For details about Banks,
refer to page 116.

NOTICE

2-1.

While holding down the [MEMORY]
button...

2-2. Press the desired numbered button.

When the Registration is stored, the LED of the numbered button flashes
momentarily.

When storing the
Registration to the
numbered button, a “”
mark appears at the top left
of the display indicating
that the Registration data
is currently being saved.
Do not turn the power off
while the Registration is
being saved, otherwise the
data will be lost.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

111

To store Registrations 9 – 16

Although this Electone has just eight Registration Memory buttons, up to sixteen
Registrations can be stored by turning on the [9-16] button to make the numbered
buttons function as 9 – 16. To restore to the 1-8, turn off the [9-16] button. Then, in
both cases, all you have to do is simply press the desired numbered button while
holding down the [MEMORY] button as described in step 2.

Reference Page
Saving the Registration Data
to USB Flash Drive
(page 147)

Functions and settings that cannot be memorized:
The following settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory number.
• Pitch (page 181)

• LCD contrast

• MIDI Control settings (page 190)

• Wireless LAN settings

• LCD related settings (page 27)

Registration Memory

The following settings are common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and
cannot be stored individually for each number.
• Transpose (page 181)

• User rhythms (page 76)

• Registration Shift (page 121)

• Rhythm Sequences (page 86)

• Auto Fill setting (page 72)

• Disable setting (page 114)

• Reverb type (page 62)

• Disable mode (page 114)

• Keyboard Percussion Kit/Assign

112

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

2 Selecting Registrations
Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to
select. (The selected button’s LED lights.)

To call up one of the Registrations 9 – 16, turn on the [9-16] button, then press the
appropriate numbered button.
Example: Calling up Registration Number 11

2. Press the appropriate button

Registration Memory

1. Turn on the [9-16] button...

To call up the Registrations stored to another Bank
If you’ve selected another Bank and stored Registrations to it, you will need to select
the same Bank to recall the Registrations. Select the Bank in Page 3 of the VOICE
display, then press the panel numbered button to recall the Registration. For details
on how to select the Bank, refer to page 116.
You can also recall Registrations in a pre-programmed order by using the right
footswitch. This function is called “Registration Shift” (page 121).

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

113

NOTE
The Disable function is
available even after
changing the Bank.

Using the [DISABLE] button:
Keep in mind that rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns as well as the tempo
also change when you select different Registration Memory buttons. There may be times
during your performance when you want to keep the same rhythm going, even when you
make Registration Memory changes. Pressing the [DISABLE] button allows you to keep
the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on throughout all your
Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if you want to.

When the [DISABLE] button is on, the following functions will not change, even when
you change the Registration Memory number.
• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm
reverb
• Rhythm reverb time
• Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of
Accompaniment parts
• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory
• M.O.C. mode

5
Registration Memory

The particular settings that do not change when the [DISABLE] button is on depend on
the Disable mode setting. For details on the Disable mode, see “Selecting Disable Mode”
below.

Selecting Disable mode:
The Disable mode enables you to select what is to be disabled when the [DISABLE]
button is on. There are two Disable modes: Normal (rhythm menu, tempo, etc. are
disabled) and Tempo (only tempo is disabled).

Press the [UTILITY] button.
The UTILITY display appears.

2
3

114

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Use the Page buttons to select Page 1.
Press the [B] button to set DISABLE MODE to “NORMAL” or
“TEMPO.”
NORMAL
When the Disable Mode is set to Normal and the [DISABLE] button is on, the
following functions will not change, even when you change the Registration
Memory number.
• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm
reverb
• Rhythm reverb time
• Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of
Accompaniment parts
• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory
• M.O.C. mode

TEMPO
When the Disable Mode is set to Tempo and the [DISABLE] button is on, the
rhythm tempo will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory
number.

5
Registration Memory

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

115

3 Storing Registrations to Another Bank
Registration Memory and Banks
The ELB-02 series lets you create up to five Registration Banks A – E, each of which
consists of 1 – 16 Registration Memories. Although preset various Registrations are
stored to the Number buttons 1 – 16 of only Bank A by default, you can replace them
with your original Registrations. Your original Registrations can be stored also to
Banks B – E, up to a maximum of 80 Registrations. Executing the Initialize function
(page 120) recalls the preset Registrations of Bank A, and then resets the created
Registrations of Banks B – E to their original empty status.
Bank E
Bank D
Bank C
Bank B
Registration Bank A

5
Registration Memory

With the default initial settings and Bank A selected, you can store your original
Registrations to Banks A and B. Bank C is available only after Registrations have
been stored to Bank B. Likewise, other Banks (up to Bank E) will not be available
until the Bank preceding it contains data.

To select the Bank:

116

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Call up the VOICE Display, then select the Page 3.
The currently selected Registration bank will be shown.

Select the desired Bank by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
You can select the Banks from A (at top) to an empty Bank next to the last Bank
containing data. When Banks A and B contain Registration data, for example,
you can select Banks A, B, and C (which is empty). The message shows whether
the selected Bank contains data or not. When you select the Bank containing
data, no message is shown, while a message “Registration is not recorded” is
shown when you select an empty Bank.

To store the Registration:

NOTE

When you try to store
Registrations after changing
the Bank, a confirmation
dialog appears. Confirm
whether or not you want to
set the current Bank as the
destination. If you want to set
the current Bank as the
destination, press the [C]
“OK” button, or press the [D]
“CANCEL” button to cancel
the operation.

Create your original Registration, then store it to any of the
Number buttons 1 – 16. (This corresponds to steps 1 – 2 on
page 111.)

4 Deleting Banks
Select the desired Bank to be deleted in Page 3 of the VOICE display, then press the
[D] button corresponding to “DELETE” in the display. A message “Are you sure you
want to delete the Bank xx” appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Press
the [C] “DELETE” button if you want to delete the Bank, or [D] “CANCEL” button
to cancel the operation.
Bank A can only be deleted if data is stored to another bank (other than A).

Registration Memory

Data of Banks that follow the deleted Bank will be moved up to the previous Bank
respectively. For example, deleting the Bank A will move the data of Bank B to Bank
A, Bank C to Bank B, Bank D to Bank C, and Bank E to Bank D.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

117

Saving the Registration Data to USB

5 Flash Drive
Reference Page
What is a Song? (page 134)

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

The Registration data stored to the Number buttons can be saved to a USB flash
drive connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
For details about the save operation, see Chapter 6, Music Data Recorder (MDR).
The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a USB flash
drive.
Make sure to use one of the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible
USB Device List downloadable from the Yamaha website:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/recalling operations to abort,
etc. Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Device” on
page 132.

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.

Press the [MDR] button.
The MDR display appears.

Registration Memory

3
4

118

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Confirm the SONG Page is shown.
Confirm “SONG” is shown at the top right of the display. If another page is
shown, select the “SONG” Page by simultaneously pressing both Page buttons.
Select the Song to which you want to save the Registration data.
Press the [B] button corresponding to the “
” in the display to call up the
Song/Folder list, in which you can find “new song” (blank Song) at the bottom
of the list. Select “new song” by rotating the DATA CONTROL dial.

Press the [D] “UNIT” button.
The UNIT EDIT display appears.

Press the [B] “SAVE” button.
A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved.
When the operation is completed, the message closes and the Song name and
the Unit number will be shown in the display. The Registration data stored to
Banks A – E is now saved as a Unit to the USB flash drive.
Song name

Registration Memory

5
Unit number

Reference Page

Press the [D] “EXIT” button.
The display returns to MDR display.

Recalling Recorded
Registrations (page 154)

Reference Page
Changing the Song/Folder
Name (page 144)

About Banks and Units
The Registration Memory data (16
x up to 5 Banks) stored to internal
memory of the instrument will be
handled as a “Unit.” If you want to
create more than 80 (=16 x 5
Banks) Registrations, create
another Unit to create more
additional Registrations. The Unit
can be edited in the MDR
function. See page 147.

Song

Unit 3
Unit 2
Unit 1
Bank E
Bank D
Bank C
Bank B
Registration Memory Bank A

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

119

6 Initializing Registration Memory
NOTE
Deleting Banks (page 117)

Deleting all Registration data in Registration Memory initializes the Registration
Memory and restores the original factory-programmed Registration Memory
presets. Be careful when using this operation, since it erases all your existing data. In
order to avoid inadvertently losing your important data, save it to a USB flash drive.
If you want to delete a specific Bank, see “Deleting Banks” on page 117.

Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Page 1 of the UTILITY
display.
If another page is shown, select Page 1 by using the Page buttons.

5
Registration Memory

Reference Page
Factory Set (Initializing the
Electone) (page 27)

120

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Press the [D] “INITIALIZE” button.
The message “Are you sure you want to initialize Registration data?” appears.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button. Press [C] “INITIALIZE” button to actually initialize the data. When the
operation is complete, the Electone will be restarted.

7 Registration Shift
The Registration Shift function conveniently allows you to change Registrations
without needing to take your hands from the keyboards.
By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, you can “jump” to a specified
Registration or step through the panel Registrations in sequence, either in numeric
order or in any order you specify.
Registration Shift has four modes: Off, Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the
REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display. You can also view and check the Registration Shift
mode in the VOICE Display.

Right Footswitch

Expression Pedal

Select the Bank containing the Registration you want to use.

Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button.

5
Registration Memory

Use the Page buttons to select Page 1.
The REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display appears.
REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT)
Display

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

121

Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These
are set in the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display by successive
pressing of the [A] button.
Select each in order (Off  Shift  Jump  User).
1 OFF
2 SHIFT
3 JUMP
4 USER

1 Off
Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When Off is selected, Registrations cannot
be changed by using the Right Footswitch.

2 Shift
In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects the Registration Memory
presets in their numerical order. After the last Registration is reached, the function
‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again. The LEDs of numbered buttons 1 – 16
light up as they are selected. Keep in mind that the [9-16] button lights up in addition
to the selected numbered button if Registrations 9 – 16 are selected.

5
Registration Memory

You can confirm the actual
Registration Shift in Page 2.

NOTE
In the Shift mode, the Right
Footswitch cannot call up
another Registration Bank.

122

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Bank

Current Registration

Next Registration

3 Jump

NOTE

Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the designated panel Registration.
Press the [B] button to select the Jump destination.

In the Jump mode, the Right
Footswitch cannot call up
another Registration Bank.

You can confirm the actual
Registration Shift in Page 2.

Bank

Current Registration

Registration number of the destination

5
Registration Memory

4 User
In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to
the order you’ve specified. You can also specify an end point for the Registration Shift
function. User Shift can be set in Page 2, and Shift End can be set in Page 1 of the
REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display.

To set the User Registration order:
Before proceeding, set the mode to 4 User.

Select the Bank containing the Registration you want to use.
For details about how to select Banks, refer to page 116.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

123

Call up Page 2 of the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display.
[Page 2] REGIST SHIFT
(RIGHT) Display

Enter the Registration Number

NOTE
To select the Registration
from another Bank, select
desired Bank in the Page 3
of the VOICE display
(page 116). To go back to
the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT)
display, press the [FOOT
SWITCH] button.

Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory
section.
If you want to use 9 – 16 Registrations, turn on the [9-16] button, then press the
desired numbered button.

5
Registration Memory

Press the [A] “INS.” (Insert) button.

Highlighted cursor indicates the data entry position.

NOTE
No Bank indication will be
shown as long as same
Registration Bank will be
used.

The Bank indication and Registration number appears in the
display, indicating that the Registration is entered.

Bank

124

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

6
7

Repeat steps 1 through 4 above to set additional numbers in the
Registration order. Up to 400 steps with 80 Registrations (16
Registrations x 5 Banks) can be memorized.

After settings, move the cursor to the top position with DATA
CONTROL dial, then press the Right Footswitch as you play the
Electone.
Each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order
you’ve specified. If you’ve inadvertently advanced the shift setting in the middle
of your performance, use DATA CONTROL dial to move the cursor back to the
correct position.

Move the cursor to the desired point with the [C] and [D] buttons or
DATA CONTROL dial, then insert or delete the desired number by using
the [A] and [B] buttons.

NOTICE
The Registration Shift
setting will be
automatically saved to the
Registration data when you
switch to another display.
While data is being saved,
a “” mark appears at the
top left of the display
indicating that the
Registration data is
currently being saved. Do
not turn the power off while
the save operation is in
progress, or without
switching to another
display, otherwise the data
will be lost.

NOTE
Registration data cannot be
added or deleted when the
cursor position is at the
“TOP” (found at the lower left
of the screen) after inputting
the number. Add or delete
the data after moving the
cursor by rotating the DATA
CONTROL dial clockwise.

NOTE

Data Entry Position: Highlighted cursor indicates the current data entry
position.
If you want to move the cursor to the left, press the [C] button or turn the DATA
CONTROL dial counter-clockwise. If you want to move the cursor to the right, press
the [D] button or turn the DATA CONTROL dial clockwise.

Registration Memory

Move the cursor position

Up to five Registration
numbers can be displayed
at once in the LCD; however,
screen scrolling is enabled
when four or more
Registration numbers are
input. Turn the DATA
CONTROL dial counterclockwise to scroll back
toward the beginning.

Insert: Use the [A] button.
This is for initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the
Registration row.
To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button, then press the [A]
“INS.” button. The entered Registration number will appear in the Registration row.
After using [A] “INS.” button to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among
the numbers.
Insert can also be used to insert a Registration number just before the current cursor
position. To perform the operation, first move the data entry position to a numbered
position. Then, press the desired Registration Memory button, and press the [A]
“INS.” button. The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all
other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new
numbers.
Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s
capacity of 400. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, “INS.” in the display will
changed to “---” and the operation cannot be executed.
Delete: Use the [B] button.
To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and
press the [B] “DEL.” button.
ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

125

Shift End:
Determines the end point for the Registration Shift function.
Press the Page buttons to select Page 1.
Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to change
the setting.

1 STOP
2 TOP
3 NEXT UNIT

1 Stop
Selects the last Registration and quits the operation.

2 Top
After the last preset is reached, “Top” is called up, returning operation to the
beginning. To select the first preset, press the Right Footswitch.

Registration Memory

Reference Page
Next Unit Settings (using
more than 80 Registrations in
one performance)
(page 153)

NOTE
• When you play the Song
using Next Unit function,
always press the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button to start the
Song with CUSTOM PLAY
function (page 156) is set
to off since CUSTOM PLAY
function will not activate the
Next Unit function.
• When you use the Next
Unit function during
Rhythm playback, Rhythm
Sequence and User
Rhythm cannot be loaded.

126

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

3 Next Unit
After the last preset is reached, the next Unit in the Song on the MDR is called up.
This function is available only when two or more Units are saved in one Song. This
function is handy when you need to play a Song with more than 80 Registrations.
The Shift End mark ( : Top,
: Next) will automatically be put at the end of the
Registrations you entered when Top or Next Unit is selected as the Shift End.

6 Music Data Recorder (MDR)
The Music Data Recorder (MDR) is a sophisticated recording system built into the Electone that
lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash drive. Moreover, the
MDR allows you to perform various other operations to your Song data (such as copy, delete and
convert).
Compatible USB flash drives
Please make sure to use one of the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible USB Device List
downloadable from the Yamaha website:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/recalling operations to abort, etc. Before using a USB flash
drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Device” on page 132.

Copy

Song data
USB flash drive

Delete

Convert

1 Calling Up the MDR Display
Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the MDR display. All operations
related to the MDR, such as recording and playing your performances, can be done
from the MDR display.

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

MDR Display

Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the MDR display is open exits
from the MDR display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the
[MDR] button again to recall the MDR display.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

127

2 Using the MDR Display
The MDR display consists of seven display Pages. Each Page is devoted to a specific
function, and you can call up the desired function or operation by selecting the
appropriate Page. For example, first select the SONG Page to select a target Song,
then select TOOLS1 Page to copy/convert/delete the Song, or TEMPO Page to set
the Repeat playback setting for the Song.
To select the desired Page, use Page buttons at the top right of the display on the
panel. The TEMPO Page and PART Page below will be shown when you press the
[C] “SET.” (Setting) button in the SONG Page while the Song is selected.

Page construction
SONG Page

TOOLS1 Page

• Select target Song

TOOLS2 Page

• Copy/Delete/Convert
Song
* You can copy folder or USB
flash drive.

• Create Folder
• Format USB flash drive

• Change Song/Folder
name
• Confirm information of
Song/USB flash drive

Press the [C] “SET.” button while the Song is selected.
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Press the [D] “FINISH” button.

TEMPO Page

• Song tempo, Repeat
playback settings
• Custom Play

PART 1 Page

Part settings for Song

PART 2 Page

Part settings for Song

PART 3 Page

Part settings for XG
Song

NOTE
Keep in mind that the functions shown in the TOOLS1 and TOOLS2 Pages depend on the target selected in the SONG Page.

128

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

SONG Page:
7

4
5

1 Current USB Flash Drive/Folder
Displays the currently selected USB flash drive or folder. The contents included in 1
are listed as 2 below.
2 USB Flash Drive/Folder/Song List
Displays the USB flash drive, folders or Songs.
3 Scroll bar
If the USB flash drive/folder/Song list contains more than 5 USB flash drive/folders/
Songs, you can scroll through the display with the DATA CONTROL dial.
4 UP
Selects the higher layer folder or USB flash drive by pressing the [A] button.
5 IN
Selects the next lower (or deeper) layer folder or USB flash drive by pressing the [B]
button.

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

6 Page
Selects the Page of the display if the display contains two or more Pages.
7 Unit
Show the Unit name last used (shown as blank unless the UNIT is used).

If USB flash drive cannot be found:
Press the [A] “
” button several times until the indication
changes to “
.”
The USB flash drive list will be displayed. If there are more than three media
selections, scroll through the display with the DATA CONTROL dial to display and
select the desired USB flash drive.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

129

If Songs cannot be found:

1
2

Check the current USB flash drive/ folder (page 129 1).
If the desired Song is stored in the currently displayed folder, use
the DATA CONTROL dial to display and select the Song.
If the desired Song is stored in a different folder, use the DATA CONTROL dial
and the [A] “
” and [B] “
” buttons to select the folder in which
the desired Song is stored.

Song icons


These icons are shown when you select a USB flash drive, folder, and Song.

Indicates a USB flash drive. This icon is displayed in the USB flash drive/
folder list.
Indicates a folder.

Indicates that performance data is contained in the Song.

Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 163 for details.

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 163 for details.

Indicates an XG-compatible Song.

130

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Media (USB flash drive) Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files
Folders:
A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple Songs in groups. If
you've saved hundreds of Songs to a USB flash drive, it may be difficult to find the
desired Song quickly. Organizing your Songs in folders, with similar Songs grouped
together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier to find the Songs
you want.

Song
1

Song
2

Song
3

Song
4

Song
5

Song
6

Song 1 2

Folder 001

Creating folders
Song

Song

Song 4 5

Folder 002

Song

USB flash drive

Songs:
A Song is a “container” for storing the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to
external media. A single Song can contain both the recorded performance and
Registrations. A blank Song containing no data is displayed as a “new song.” When a Song
containing the performance data is selected, a note icon ( ) appears in the display.
Files:
A file is an element of data in a Song. For example, a single Song consists of various files,
such as Registration files and performance files. The file types listed below are created
with the MDR (The extension will not appear in the Electone display. They will, however,
be displayed on a computer.)

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Files in the Song
File

Explanation

Extension

Performance data

This file contains performance data, played on the
keyboards and pedals of the Electone.

.mid

Registration data

This file contains Registration settings, User Voices,
User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences.

.b00

XG-converted data

This file contains XG Song data, for which Electone
performance data is converted to XG-compatible
format.

.mid

In addition, one file (extension: .nam) is automatically created in each folder for
organization/maintenance of the folder contents. It does not appear on the Electone
display.

NOTE
Audio files cannot be saved
to a Song, even if created
with the Audio Recording
features (page 169).

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

131

Connecting a USB Device
You can connect a USB flash drive (sold separately) or a USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately) to the
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal. You can save data you’ve created on the instrument to the USB flash drive (pages
118, 147), or you can connect the instrument to a smart device such as iPad via wireless LAN (page 192).

Precautions when using the
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal


This instrument features a built-in [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device
to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device
with care. Follow the important precautions below.

NOTE
• If you intend to connect two or three devices at the same time
to a terminal, you should use a self-powered USB hub. Only
one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears while
using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument,
then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the
USB hub.
• When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is
less than 3 meters.
• Do not connect an extension cable.

NOTE
For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to
the owner’s manual of the USB device.

Using USB Flash Drives
Compatible USB devices



• USB flash drive
• USB hub
• USB wireless LAN adaptor

By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive,
you can save data you’ve created to the connected
device, as well as read data from the connected
device.

Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse
cannot be used.
The instrument does not necessarily support all
commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot
guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase.
Before purchasing a USB device for use with this
instrument, please visit the following web page:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on this
instrument, the amount of time for saving to or loading
from the USB device may differ depending on the type of
data or the status of the instrument.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

NOTE
The rating of the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of 5V/
500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above this,
since this can cause damage to the instrument itself.

Connecting USB devices
When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is
appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction.
NOTICE
• When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal on the top panel, remove it before closing the key
cover (if you use the separately sold key cover). If the key
cover is closed with the USB device connected, the USB
device may be damaged.
• Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB device during
playback/recording and file management operations (such
as Save, Copy, Delete and Format), or when accessing the
USB device. Failure to observe this may result in
“freezing” of the operation of the instrument or corruption
of the USB device and the data.
• When connecting then disconnecting the USB device (and
vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the
two operations.

132

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Maximum number of USB flash drives
allowed
Up to two USB flash drives can be connected to the [USB
TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The
number of USB flash drives that can be recognized
simultaneously with musical instruments even when a USB
hub is used is a maximum of four.)

Formatting a USB Flash Drive
You should format the USB flash drive only with this
instrument (page 133). A USB flash drive formatted on
another device may not operate properly.
NOTICE
The format operation overwrites any previously existing
data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting
does not contain important data. Proceed with caution,
especially when connecting multiple USB flash drive.

To protect your data (write-protect)
To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,
apply the write-protect provided with each USB flash drive.
If you are saving data to the USB flash drive, make sure to
disable write-protect.

Turning off the instrument
When turning off the instrument, make sure that the
instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by
playback/recording or file management (such as during
Save, Copy, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do so
may corrupt the USB flash drive and the data.

3 Formatting a USB Flash Drive
If you find that you are unable to use a new, blank USB flash drive or an old one that
has been used with other devices, you may need to format it. Formatting erases all
the data in the USB flash drive and makes it ready to record. The data erased by
formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the USB flash drive
contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the operation.
Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB flash drives.

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminals.

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the MDR display.

Select the desired USB flash drive you want to format.
If a single USB flash drive is connected, only USB 01 will be displayed. After
that, if you connect another USB flash drive, the latter one will be displayed as
USB 02. If the desired USB flash drive is not selected, use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the desired one.
Press the Page buttons at the top right of the display to call up the
TOOLS1 Page.

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

6
Reference Page
If USB flash drive cannot be
found: (page 129)

NOTE
If two (or more) USB flash
drives are connected, which
of them is labeled USB 01 or
USB 02 may change when
you turn on the power to the
instrument.

Currently
selected USB
flash drive name

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

133

5
NOTICE
Never attempt to
disconnect the USB flash
drive or turn the power off
during formatting. Doing
so may corrupt the USB
flash drive data.

Press the [D] “FORMAT” button in the display.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the
operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
Press the [C] “FORMAT” button to format the USB flash drive.
When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to SONG Page.

4 Selecting a Song
Reference Page
USB flash drive (Media)
Contents: Folders, Songs,
and Files (page 131)

NOTICE

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

While the instrument is
accessing data, do NOT
remove the USB flash
drive. (Some USB flash
drives are equipped with
an LED. The LED will flash
while the USB flash drive is
being accessed.)

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

In order to record your performance to the USB flash drive or to load Registrations
in the USB flash drive back to the Electone, you will need to select a Song, as
described below.
What is a Song?
You can think of a song as a “container” for storing the Electone data for a piece of music,
recorded to external media. A single song can contain both the recorded performance
and Registrations.

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal, then press the [MDR] button.
MDR Display [SONG Page]

Currently selected USB flash drive name

The SONG Page of the MDR display appears. In the SONG Page, you can select
a blank Song for recording your performance or saving the Registration
settings, or you can select a desired Song for playback.

134

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Select the desired USB flash drive.

Reference Page
If USB flash drive cannot be
found: (page 129)

NOTE
If two (or more) USB flash
drives are connected, which
of them is labeled USB 01 or
USB 02 may change when
you turn on the power to the
instrument.

If a single USB flash drive is connected, only USB 01 will be displayed. After
that, if you connect another USB flash drive, the latter one will be displayed as
USB 02. If the desired USB flash drive is not selected, use the DATA
CONTROL dial to select the desired one.
Select a Song.
Press the [B] “
” button to call up the Song/folder list contained in the
USB flash drive, then select the desired Song by using the DATA CONTROL
dial.

NOTE
The “new song” file is a
blank Song automatically
created in the USB flash
drive/folder, if the number of
the Songs in the USB flash
drive/folder is less than 100.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Reference Page
• Changing the Song/Folder
Name (page 144)
• Song Icons (page 130)

Select “new song” at the bottom of the list if you want to make a new recording
or save data.
To simply play an existing Song, select the desired Song (containing data),
referring to the Song name and icons. The selected Song is highlighted.
Song containing data
Blank Song (containing no data)

For details about how to select songs in a folder, see “Selecting a Song in a
Folder” on page 136.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

135

Reference Page

Playback Settings

• Playing Back the Selected
Part(s) (page 157)

Pressing the [C] “SET.” button in the SONG Page of the MDR display while the Song is
selected calls up a display of the currently selected Song, letting you confirm the tempo/
repeat settings (TEMPO Page) or parts that are played when playing the Song (PART
Pages). These Pages can be switched by pressing the Page buttons in the order: TEMPO
 PART 1  PART 2  PART 3.

• Changing the Tempo
(page 158)

When playing back the Song (by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel), only
those parts that are set to “PLAY” in the display actually play at the indicated tempo
(over a range of 50% to 200% of the original tempo when recording). If the Song contains
no performance data, all parts are set to “OFF.”

Selecting the Song in the Folder:
Keep in mind that the Song in the folder will not be shown in the display unless you
open the folder which contains the Song. The illustrations below shows you how to
use the display to access a specific Song in a folder of a USB flash drive (in this case,
calling up the Song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star”).

NOTE
The new Song is a blank
Song which is automatically
created in the USB flash
drive/folder, if the number of
the Songs in the USB flash
drive/folder is less than 100.

USB flash drive
(USB 01)

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

FOLDER_001

FOLDER_002
Twinkle Twinkle
Little Star

new song

SONG 001

new song

The illustration below shows the levels of folders and Songs in the USB flash drive.
Follow the dark arrows and the accompanying instruction steps to select the desired
Song, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.”
First level
(root directory)

USB flash drive (USB 01)

1. Press the [B] button
Second level
in the root
directory

2. Use the DATA CONTROL dial

FOLDER_001

FOLDER_002

3. Press the [B] button
Third level in the
root directory

SONG 001

new song

4. Use the DATA CONTROL dial

Twinkle Twinkle
Little Star

new song

Songs or folders in the same level can be selected in sequence by turning the DATA
CONTROL dial.

136

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Here is the actual procedure again, in linear form:

Press the [B] button corresponding to the “
” in the display
to call up the folder/Songs list in the selected USB flash drive.

FOLDER_001, FOLDER_002 and SONG_001 are displayed.

Select FOLDER_002 by turning the DATA CONTROL dial.

Press the [B] button to call up the song in the FOLDER_002.

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

In this case, already “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star”
is selected.

Select the desired Song, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star,” by turning
the DATA CONTROL dial.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

137

5 Recording
MDR Recording
This lets you record your performance as a Song to a USB flash drive. A Song is
comprised of your keyboard performance information and is not a recording of the
actual sound itself. The performance information refers to which keys are played, at what
timing, and at what strength — just as in a musical score. Based on the recorded
performance information, the tone generator of the Electone outputs the corresponding
sound. MDR also records Registrations such as Voice selection, effect settings and so on
for future recall. In addition, this method enables you to record parts individually and rerecord a specific part.
Keep in mind that the Song recorded on the Electone using the MDR function is
intended for playing back only on the Electone, so you cannot transfer the Song to other
devices such as a portable music player for playing the Song on such devices. If you want
to do so, record your performance as an audio file in the method described in Chapter 7
“Audio” on page 169.

Recording


Before recording, set up the Electone just as you’ll need it for the entire recording.
Set the desired Registrations you’ll use throughout the performance/recording in
Registration Memory and make sure also to select the Registration that you will use
at the beginning of the Song.

Reference Page

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

NOTE
When you record the Song
using the Next Unit function,
make sure to press the
[PLAY/PAUSE] button before
pressing the [RECORD]
button. For details, see
page 154.

1
2

138

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
Press the [MDR] button, then select the blank Song “new song” for
recording your performance.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

Press the [RECORD] button in the
Music Data Recorder section on
the panel.
The lamp of the [RECORD] button
lights, indicating that the Electone is
ready to record.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [STOP] button.

5
6

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button at the top left on the panel to start
the recording.
The lamp of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button lights up and a small indicator flashes
across from left to right at the bottom left of the LCD display. This indicates
that Registration data is currently being saved as a Unit to the Song.

Reference Page
Unit (page 119)

After “00:00” appears at the bottom left of the LCD display, begin
playing.

When you finish playing, press the [STOP] button.
Recording stops and your performance is written to the Song.
The Song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named like
“SONG_001.” You can change the Song name as desired. (For details, see
page 144.)

NOTICE
Do not remove the USB
flash drive from the
instrument during
recording.

To hear your newly recorded performance, press the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button.
Playback will begin after a couple of seconds, as the Electone reads the
Registration. For more information on playback and other playback-related
functions, see page 155.

NOTE

Outline of MDR Operation
Basically, the MDR independently records the following three types of data:

Saving Registrations
(page 147)

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Registration data (including Bulk data)
All registrations stored to the Registration Memory numbered buttons as well as the
registration currently set to the panel, are recorded at the beginning of a Song, before the
actual recording of your performance. Bulk data is also saved to the Song with the
Registration data. Bulk data includes: Registration Shift settings, Rhythm Pattern (User
rhythms) and Rhythm Sequence data, and User voices.
Performance data
The MDR records your performance on the keyboards and pedalboard of the Electone
exactly as you play it, even recording the strength at which you play the keys and how
hard you press them down while playing. The various types of performance data –
Upper, Lower, Pedal and Lead – are recorded to independent “tracks,” so that you can
change any one of them without affecting the others.
Control data
All changes you make on the Electone during your performance are recorded in real
time. These include registration changes, the use of the expression pedals and
footswitches.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

139

Re-recording (Retry)

NOTE
After exiting from the
recording mode, you can rerecord your performance
using the same Registration.

1 Select the Song you
want to re-record.
After selecting the Song,
select the TOOL1 Page with
the Page buttons, then
press the [B] “DELETE”
button. A message appears
prompting confirmation of
operation. Press the [C]
“PERF. ONLY”
(Performance Only) button
to delete only the
performance data.

2 Load the Unit of the
Song to the Electone
(page 154).

If you make a mistake during recording, you can simply re-record the song from the
beginning.

1
2
3

Press the [RECORD] button while the Song is still running.
This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the
Song. The lamp of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button starts flashing, indicating that
you can re-record the Song.
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
Re-recording starts from the beginning of the Song and replaces the previously
recorded performance with the newly recorded performance.
Press the [STOP] button.

3 Start recording in the
normal way (and not in
the way described in
“Re-recording” here.

Recording Each Part Separately

Reference Page

Control data (page 139)

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets
you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration
changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the Song.
Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice 1 can be recorded separately. The
following instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to the Song
using the Lower and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper
Keyboard.

140

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Follow steps 1 through 3 on page 138 to call up the Rec Standby
display.

Select the Page PART 1 or PART 2 with the Page buttons.

Select the parts for recording.
In this case, set the Lower Keyboard (LOWER) and Pedalboard (PEDAL) to
“RECORD,” while other parts to “OFF.”
PART 1 Page

PART 2 Page

Each press of the [A] – [C] button corresponding to the desired part in the
display toggles the status among PLAY, OFF and RECORD. Turn off the parts
you don’t want to record, and make sure “PLAY” is selected for the parts you
want to play and “RECORD” for the part you want to record.

NOTE
You should also set the
CONTROL to “REC,” in order
to record Registration
changes and expression
pedal operation.

NOTE
When you record the
Keyboard Percussion, make
sure that the KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION [1] button is
set to on.

PLAY:
Playback of parts that have been recorded.
OFF:
Recording or playback is not active.
RECORD: Recording of the part.

If you set the UPPER part to “REC,” the performance on the Upper Keyboard
(including Lead Voice 1 Voices) is recorded. Setting LEAD to “REC,” however,
records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set both Upper and Lead to
“REC” at the same time; neither can the LOWER and KBP (Keyboard
Percussion) parts be recorded at the same time.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. After “00:00” appears at the
bottom left of the LCD display, begin playing.

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Press the [STOP] button when you are finished with your
performance to stop recording.
Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance.

Setting up recording of the next part—Upper part in this case.

6
7

Press the [RECORD] button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. To overwrite, press
the [C] “OVERWRITE” button.
Select the PART Page with the Page buttons, then select the parts
for recording.
Set the parts you want to record next (in this case, the Upper part) to “REC.”
Also set the part already recorded (in this case, the Lower and Pedal parts) to
“PLAY,” so that you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new
ones.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

141

If you want to change the part tempo for ease in recording, perform steps 8 and 9;
otherwise, skip to step 10.

Select the TEMPO Page with the Page buttons.

Change the playback tempo, if desired.
The playback tempo can be set over a range of 50% to 200% of the original. The
original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result in a slower
tempo while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo.
Use the [A] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
change the tempo.

10 Press the [C] button repeatedly, if necessary, to set “CUSTOM
PLAY” to ON to start recording of the new part or parts.

11 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel to start recording,

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

then begin playing.
Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The CUSTOM
PLAY function is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for
recording, and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback.
While you listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the
Upper Keyboard.
When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is
automatically stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot
exceed the length of the previously recorded parts.

12 To stop the recording, press the [STOP] button.

142

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Punch-in Recording


This lets you re-record over a specific phrase or section—either that of a specific
part(s) or all parts.

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.

NOTE
This function is best used
when the phrase to be
rerecorded has definite
beginning and end points,
with slight pauses before
and after.

Reference Page

3
4
5
6
7
8

Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song which contains the
phrase you want to change.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback of the Song.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button at the point you want to execute
punch-in recording.
The current Song is stopped momentarily.
Press the [RECORD] button.
The lamp of the [RECORD] button lights, indicating that the MDR is ready to
record.
Set the parts which you want to change to “RECORD” status and
other parts to “PLAY.”
Part settings can be set in Pages PART 1 and PART 2. You can cancel the record
standby mode at this point by pressing the [STOP] button.

Reference Page
Recording Each Part
Separately (page 140)

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start punch-in recording. Play
the new phrase, as you want it to be changed.

Press the [STOP] button to quit punch-in recording as soon as you
reach the end of the phrase.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

143

6 Changing the Song/Folder Name
NOTE
However, Song names of ELseries Electones, such as the
EL-900, cannot be changed.

Reference Page

Even though the Electone automatically assigns a generic name to each recorded
Song, it’s best to give each Song a “meaningful” name, such as an original title or
even a date indicating when it was recorded.

Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

2
3

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song/folder whose name
you want to change.
For details on selecting a Song or a folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
Use the Page buttons to select the TOOLS2 Page.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

NOTE
A blank Song cannot be
named. Once a Song
contains data, it can be
named.

Press the [D] “CHANGE NAME” button.
The CHANGE NAME display appears.

Cursor

144

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [A] buttons.
Pressing the [A] button moves the cursor one step to the right, and holding
moves the cursor to the right continuously. When the cursor reaches to the end
of the name, it will return to the beginning of the name.

Cursor

Change the character at the cursor position.
Replace the current character at the cursor by using the DATA CONTROL dial.

Turn it clockwise to select the characters in order, and counter-clockwise for
reverse order.
Blank

NOTE

A – Z (capital)

If “ENGLISH” is selected as
the Language in the Utility
display (page 27), Japanese
katakana characters are
unavailable.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

a – z (lower case)
Japanese katakana
Marks
Number 0 – 9

To delete a character:
Move the cursor to the character you want to delete, and press the [C] button.
When the character is deleted, all other numbers to the right of the cursor are
moved one step to the left.
To insert a character:
Move the cursor one step right to the position at which you want to enter the
character, press the [B] button then use the DATA CONTROL dial.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

145

NOTE
An XG Song name can
contain up to 46 characters.

7
8
9

Repeat steps 5 through step 6 above to finish entering the Song
name.
Up to 50 characters can be entered.
After finishing, press the [D] “EXIT” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the
operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
To actually enter the change, press the [C] “CHANGE” button.
The renamed Song/folder is displayed.

An error message (“This name is not available”) may appear when pressing the [C]
“CHANGE” button to finish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is
invalid and you’ll need to enter a different name. The following names cannot be used.
(The letters “xx” indicate numbers.)

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

146

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

MDR_xx.EVT

ELS_SONG.NAM

MDR_xxx.TMP

TMP

MDR_xx.MID

MDR_xxx.MID

REG_xxx.TMP

TMP.E02

MDR_xx.Bxx

REG_xxx.B00

ELS_SONG.TMP

MDR_xx.Vxx

SONG_xxx.C02

SONG.NAM

7 Saving Registrations
You can also record Registration Memory data and other created data, separate from
performance recording, as listed below. The data will be saved to a Unit of the
selected Song.

Data saved to a Unit

NOTE

 Registration Memory 16 x 5 Banks
 Registration Shift settings
 Reverb Type, Disable mode, [DISABLE] button on/off status
 User Keyboard Percussion
 When loading Registration data containing the following data created on the ELS
series,) User Rhythm data, Rhythm Sequence data, User Voice data, Voice Link
data

Even if you’ve only created a
couple of Registrations
yourself, 16 separate
Registration Memory
settings are always stored
when saving to a Song—the
factory preset Registrations
being stored if no new
settings have been made to
the numbers.

NOTE
Units can be saved to Songs
created on the ELS or ELB
series, but not to Songs
created on the EL series
such as EL-900.

Song

Unit 3
Unit 2

Reference Page

Unit 1

Bank and Unit (page 119)
Bank E
Bank D
Bank C
Bank B

Reference Page
Functions and settings that
cannot be memorized
(page 112)

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Registration Memory Bank A

There are two ways to save Registrations.

Method 1

1
2
3

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

First make all the desired Electone settings to create your original
Registration.

Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination (blank Song).
Select “new song.” For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

147

Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.
“NEW UNIT” (blank Unit) is selected.

Press the [B] “SAVE” button.
A message appears, indicating that the Registration data is currently being
saved. After the message disappears, the Unit to which the Registration is
recorded is automatically named “UNIT 1,” and “SONG XXX” (XXX: number)
is assigned as Song name to the destination Song.
Song name

Unit number

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Reference Page
Changing the Song/Folder
Name (page 144)

Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.

Method 2

1
2

148

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

First make all the desired settings you want to save, then select the
destination (blank Song) as you did in steps 1 and 3 above.

Press the [RECORD] button on the panel to enable recording on
the MDR.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to record the Registrations, then
press the [STOP] button before the “00:00” indication is shown at
the bottom left of the display.
This is the same procedure as the one shown when you start recording. The
“00:00” at the bottom left of the display indicates that the MDR is recording the
Registrations and being set up for normal recording; pressing the [STOP]
button interrupts this process.

Saving Two or More Registration Units to One Song


Song

Unit 3
Unit 2
Unit 1

NOTE
Although a maximum of 50
Units can be saved to a
single Song, the actual
amount may differ since the
total number of Banks that
can be saved to 5 Units is
limited to 50. For example,
saving 5 Banks to one Unit
results in a maximum of 10
Units that can be saved to a
Song.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

When you want to use various Registrations exceeding five Registration Banks (one
Unit), you should save additional Registration Units to a Song.

Bank E
Bank D
Bank C
Bank B
Registration Memory Bank A

1
2
3

First make all the desired settings you want to save.

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.

Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination Song which
includes Registration data.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

149

Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.

In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as
“UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.”
Reference Page
Files (page 131)

5
6

NOTE

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

When playing back an EL
Song (created on the EL
series, such as EL-900)
which uses the Next Song
function, the Unit data in the
next Song will be loaded.

150

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Select the blank Registration bank “NEW UNIT” to which you want
to save the additional Registration bank, located at the bottom of
the list, by using the DATA CONTROL dial.
Press the [B] “SAVE” button.
The Registration Unit will be added and follows previously contained Units.
Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.
To play this Song, first press the [D] “EXIT” button to returns to the SONG
Page, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Keep in mind that when you play
back this Song, the “UNIT 1” will be loaded to the Electone, but the next Unit
will not be loaded unless you make the Next Unit settings of Registration Shift
(page 153).

Overwriting Registration data to a Unit


This operation lets you replace just the Registration Unit without changing the
performance data in already recorded Song data.

1
2
3

First make all the desired settings you want to save to the new
Registration.

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.

Press the [MDR] button, and then select the desired Song
containing the Registration you wish to replace.
When a Song contains performance data, a note icon ( ) will appear at the left
of the Song name.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

Reference Page
Song icons (page 130)

Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

6
In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as
“UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.”

5
6

Select the Registration Unit number you wish to overwrite by using
the DATA CONTROL dial.

Press the [B] “SAVE” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button.

Press the [C] “OVERWRITE” button to overwrite (replace).

Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

151

Deleting Registrations


This function lets you delete the Registration Unit saved to a Song.

1
2
3

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.

Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song containing the
Registrations you wish to delete.
For details on selecting a song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.

In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as
“UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.”

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

4
5
NOTE
if you delete all the Units
from a Song, that song will
be deleted.

152

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Select the Registration Unit number you want to delete by using
the DATA CONTROL dial.

Press the [C] “DEL.” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button.

Press the [C] “DELETE” button.

Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.

Next Unit Settings (using more than 80 Registrations
in one performance)


You’ve learned in an earlier section that by using 5 Bank of 16 Registrations, you can
program a maximum of 400 settings to be recalled in a specified order, with the
Regist Shift function described on page 123.
When playing back a Song which uses more than 80 Registration numbers, you can
have two or more Registration Units saved to a single Song and recall them one by
one as you play the Song. This function that makes this possible is called Next Unit.

1
2

Set the User Registration order.
Set the Registration Shift mode to USER, and select Next UNIT as the Shift End
in Page 1 of the REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) display, then set the Use Registration
order in Page 2.
For details, see “To set the User Registration order” on page 123.
Press the [MDR] button, and select the destination Song.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

Call up the UNIT EDIT display, then save the User Registration to
“NEW UNIT” (blank Unit).

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Connect a compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.

5
6

Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.

Repeat steps 2 through 5 above to save the Registration Units in
the order you want to recall them in the same Song.
For details, see “Saving Two or More Registration Units to One Song” on
page 149.

NOTE
When repeating steps 2 – 5
and making new Registration
Shift settings, delete the
previous settings, then
continue.

Once the Next Unit function has been turned on and set, you can use the function,
following the steps below.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

153

7
8
NOTICE
When you record a Song
using the Next Unit
function, make sure to load
the top Registration Unit
(UNIT 1) to the Electone by
pressing the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button after
selecting the desired song.
If you begin the recording
procedure instead by
pressing the [RECORD]
button, even as another
Unit (UNIT 2, etc.) is
loading, a message “The
data currently loaded in the
instrument is that of Unit
xx. Are you sure you want
to save the data to Unit 1?”
will be shown. If you select
“OK,” Unit 1 will be
overwritten by the current
Unit and will be lost.

Press the [MDR] button, and select the Song for which the Next
Unit function has been set.
See steps 2 and 3 on page 135 for instructions on selecting Songs.
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
If the Song contains more than two Registration Units, the first one will be
loaded. You can check the Registration order in Page 2 of the REGIST SHIFT
(RIGHT) display.
As you play the Electone, press the Right Footswitch.
Each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to the order
you’ve specified.
After finishing the play back of the first Unit, the next Unit begins loading
automatically, and can be selected by pressing the Right Footswitch.
Right Footswitch

Expression Pedal

NOTE

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

While a rhythm is playing,
sequence data and User
rhythm in the Registration
data created on the Electone
such as ELS series cannot
be loaded.

8 Recalling Recorded Registrations
Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to the Song can be easily loaded back to the
Electone.
Use this function if you want to recall a specific Registration Unit (other than UNIT
1) from a Song which contains more than two Registration Units.

Loading Registrations


Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

1
2

154

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
Press the [MDR] button and select the Song containing the
Registrations you want to load back to the Electone.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

Press the [D] “UNIT” button to call up the UNIT EDIT display.

In the display, the Registration Unit list of the current Song is shown, such as
“UNIT 1” and “UNIT 2.”

5
6
7

Select the Registration Unit number you want to load by using the
DATA CONTROL dial.

Press the [A] “LOAD” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button.
Press the [C] “LOAD” button.
A message appears, indicating the selected Unit including the 16 Registrations
x 5 banks is currently being loaded. After the Registration data is loaded, the
LCD returns to the UNIT EDIT display.

This section describes how to play back a Song recorded with the MDR and the
commercially available Song data which can be played back with the MDR.
This operation lets you automatically load the Registration data saved to a Song
when playing back your recorded performances. Thus, you can use the loaded
Registrations for your performance.

Press the [D] “EXIT” button to exit from the UNIT EDIT Display.

9 Playing Back a Song

NOTE
If you load a Registration
while a rhythm is playing,
User rhythms and sequence
data created on the ELS
series in the Registration
data cannot be loaded.

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the Song to be
played back to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

NOTICE
Since playing back a Song
containing a Registration
data will load the
Registration data (Unit 1) in
the Song to the Electone,
the Registration data
memorized on the Electone
will be overwritten and
erased. Save your
important Registration
data on the Electone to the
USB flash drive, referring
to “Saving Registrations.”

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

Press the [MDR] button, then select the desired Song for playback.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

NOTE
Audio files will not be shown
in the MDR Display even
when the USB flash drive
contains audio files.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

155

Reference Page
Next Unit Settings (using
more than 80 Registrations in
one performance)
(page 153)

NOTE
Registration data is generally
not included in most Song
data, such as commercially
available XG Songs created
on instruments other than the
Electone.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.
A “-----” mark appears at the bottom left of the display, indicating the
Registration data is currently being loaded when the Song contains the
Registration data. When the Song contains more than two Registration Units,
the first one will be loaded.
Depending on the Song, no note icon is shown by the file name, indicating that
only Registration data is included and there is no performance data. Starting
playback of such a Song will load only Registration data, produce no sound,
and return operation to the SONG Page.

When a Song contains performance data, playback starts
automatically after reading the Registration data. (No sound will be
produced if no performance data is included).
The elapsed time will be showed on the display, and Song playback starts (if the
Song contains performance data). In general, all parts recorded to the Song are
played back; however, you can mute specific parts and play back only selected
parts (page 157). When the end of the recorded performance is reached,
playback automatically stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of
the Song by pressing the [STOP] button.

Although this Electone can play Songs created on other Electones, such as the ELS
series, the sound or tempo of the Song may differ from the original.

Reference Page
Playback Settings
(page 136)

Custom Play

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

If you want to play back the Song without resetting the Registrations, use the Custom
Play function. Turn the CUSTOM PLAY to ON in the TEMPO Page, then press the
[PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel. This displays the Song time and starts playback
immediately.

When you play a Song using the Next Unit function, make sure to turn CUSTOM PLAY
to OFF in the TEMPO Page, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start the Song.

156

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Playing Back Selected Parts


You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other
parts are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a
single part, such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts.

To play back the selected part(s):
Before or during playback, use the [A] – [C] buttons to turn the parts you want to
play back to “PLAY” and the parts you want to mute to “OFF.” Pressing the
corresponding button toggles the part setting between PLAY and OFF.
The XG part setting can be set in the PART 3 Page.

Reference Page
Playback Settings
(page 136)

Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause


Music Data Recorder (MDR)

6
Rewind and Fast Forward:
During audio playback (or when paused), press the [REW] (Rewind) button or [FF]
(Fast forward) button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired position.
When the button is released, playback is paused at the desired position. To resume
playback from the point you’ve reversed to or advanced, press the [PLAY/PAUSE]
button.

Pause:
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the Song or Songs, press the [PLAY/
PAUSE] button. To resume playback from the point at which the Song was paused,
press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

157

Changing the Tempo


You can change the tempo of the Song as the Song is playing in the MDR display,
either while the Song is stopped or while it is playing. Since the procedure for
changing the tempo is differ depends on whether the Song has an
icon or not,
confirm if the desired Song has an icon or not.

icon is included:
You can change the tempo in the following procedure.

icon is not included:
You can change the tempo by re-recording the tempo saved in the Registration data
of the Song.
Copy the Song for which you want to change the tempo, then play the edit (copied)
Song to load the Registration data to the Electone for editing. Recall the desired
Registration for editing by pressing the Registration numbered button, and change
the tempo with the TEMPO button on the panel, then record the changed tempo to
the Registration numbered button. Repeat these steps for all numbered buttons you
want to change the tempo. After finishing the settings, save (overwrite) the
Registration data to the edit Song.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

158

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song with
played back.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

icon to be

Press the [C] “SET.” button to call up the TEMPO Page.

Change the Tempo in the TEMPO Page.
Press the [A] button to select “TEMPO,” then press the same button
successively or use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting. The range
is 50 – 200%. The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less than 100% result
in a slower tempo, while values greater than 100% result in a faster tempo.

Repeat Playback


This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all Songs on a folder or only
one specific Song.

Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song you wish to
repeatedly play back.
If you wish to play back all Songs on a folder, select the first Song that will be
played back.
For details on selecting a Song or folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
Press the [C] “SET.” button, then press the Page buttons to select
the TEMPO Page.

Select the repeat mode.
Press the [B] button to select “REPEAT,” then press the same button
successively or use the DATA CONTROL dial to change the setting.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

1 OFF
2 SINGLE
3 ALL
4 RANDOM

1 Off
Cancels repeat playback.

2 Single
Repeats the currently selected Song indefinitely.

3 All
Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder in order.

4 Random
Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder randomly.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

159

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to begin playback.
To cancel the repeat setting, select “OFF” for the repeat mode.

Playing Back XG Songs

Reference Page
Converting to XG format
(page 166)

The Electone allows you to playback XG Song data, created on the computer or
converted from Electone Song format to XG format. Naturally, you can use the fast
forward, rewind and pause controls, just as with Songs (performances) recorded on
the Electone.

1
2
Reference Page
Playback Settings
(page 136)

Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the XG song
data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

Press the [MDR] button, then select the desired Song for playback.
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
Press the [C] “SET.” Button, then press the Page buttons to select
the PART Page.
You can set the volume or mute settings for each part.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

1
2
3

1 Part
Select the desired channel “CH1” through “CH16” or “ALL” to specify the part to mute/
play or to change the volume.
Press the [A] button to select “XG PART CH,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
select the setting.

2 Playback/Off
Sets the selected part for playback or mute (off). Select “PLAY” for the part you want to
play back and select “OFF” for the part you want to mute. Press the [B] button to select
“XG,” then press the same button successively to select the setting.

3 Volume
You can adjust the volume for the selected part within a range of 0 – 100.
Press the [C] button to select “XG VOLUME,” then use the DATA CONTROL dial to
select the setting.

When the selected Song contains an XG part, you can adjust the XG part on/off
setting and volume from Page 3, in the same way as you did with the XG Songs.

160

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

10 Other Operations — Copy, Delete, etc.
The TOOLS Pages in the MDR display has many functions, such as Song copy, Song
delete, confirming the Song size, etc., as well as creating or deleting folders.

Copy


This function lets you copy a folder/Song, or even a USB flash drive. You can copy
and exchange the data even between two different USB flash drives. (For Songs
created on EL-series instruments, such as the EL-900, cannot be copied.) Make sure
to check the remaining memory of the destination drive in advance. If memory
space is insufficient, or if the folder already contains 100 Songs, Copy is not
available.

1
2

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
If you want to copy a Song between two different drives, you will need to insert
the destination USB flash drive.

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

Press the [MDR] button, then select the folder/Song/USB flash
drive to be copied.
For details on selecting folder/Song/USB flash drive, see steps 2 and 3 on
page 135.
Use the Page buttons to select the TOOLS1 Page.

Press the [A] “COPY” button to call up the COPY TO Display.

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Copy Destination

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

161

Reference Page
About Protected Songs
(page 163)

NOTE
• If the USB flash drive copy
operation is executed, the
folder name “#MEDIA” will
be created in the
destination folder.

About Copying Protected Songs
Protected Original Songs or Protected Edit Songs can be copied as long as you select the
same folder that contains the source Protected Song as the destination. If you select
another folder/drive, the message “Song xx will be moved.” will be displayed. If you select
“OK,” the currently selected Protected Original Song and Protected Edit Song created
from a Protected Original Song are all moved to another folder/drive you have specified.
In this case, the data is not copied, but moved.

• If a “Path name is too long”
message is displayed,
change the hierarchy or
rename the folder name to
make it shorter.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

• The copy operation will
automatically be stopped if
an unrecognizable file is
detected in the folder.

NOTICE
Never attempt to remove
the USB flash drive or turn
the power off during
copying (or moving a
Protected Song). Data may
be lost.

As necessary, select the destination (highlighted).
Select folder or USB flash drive as the copy destination. You can even select the
destination from another USB flash drive.
For details on selecting folder/ USB flash drive, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
If you want to copy the Song/folder to the same place which contains the source
Song/folder, press the [A] “
” button when the COPY TO display
appears to make the folder/drive which contains source Songs/folders as the
destination.

Press the [C] “EXE.” button to execute the copy.
When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the SONG Page.
The folder/Song name in the destination is the same as the one of the source
Song/folder. If you copy a folder/ Song to a folder that contains a Song whose
name is the same as the source Song, the copied name will be “source Song
name_XXX” (XXX indicates Song number). If you copy an XG-compatible
Song to another folder or USB flash drive that contains a Song with the same
name as the source Song, a message appears prompting confirmation of
overwriting the Song. Selecting “OVERWRITE” overwrites the XG-compatible
Song in the destination. Selecting “CANCEL” cancel the operation.
If you want to change the folder/Song name, see page 144.
When copying the folder or USB flash drive, the approximate time
of copying appears on the display; keep in mind that the actual
time necessary may differ. Proceed by following the message in
the display.
Press the [D] button to cancel, or [C] button to execute the operation.
If you want to cancel the copy operation while the copy operation is in
progress, press the [D] “INTERRUPT” button. Keep in mind, however, that
cancelling the operation may take a long time, since the operation is stopped
only after all files in the current folder are copied.
If you cancel the operation, make sure to check which files have been properly
copied and which have not.

162

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

About Protected Songs
If you buy or download Song data, it may be protected from being deleted (to prevent
accidental erasure) or from being copied (to protect copyright ownership). These are
called “Protected Songs.” A Protected Song can be played back in the same way as Songs
you’ve created, but it cannot be converted to XG format. Registration data in the
Protected Song cannot be edited, nor can the performance data be overwritten. If you
want to edit a Protected Song, first copy it within one media/folder, then edit the copy.
(You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The copied Song (called “Protected Edit
Song”) is available only when the original Song (called “Protected Original Song”) exists
in the same folder. Be careful not to delete the Protected Original song.

Folder
Protected
Original Song

Protected Edit
Song

Copy

This Song cannot be edited

This Song can be edited, but only when it is in the
folder that contains a Protected Original Song.

NOTICE
If you move or copy the protected Song data on the computer without the Musicsoft
Downloader application, the Song cannot be played back. Always use Musicsoft Downloader
when moving or copying protected Songs on the computer.
Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address:
http://download.yamaha.com/

NOTICE

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

When you want to edit a protected Song, turn the power to the instrument off and back on
again, then select the Song to be edited. (The Registration data of the previous protected
Song will be initialized.) Otherwise the edited protected Song may not be saved.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

163

NOTICE
If the folder you are
deleting contains audio
files, deleting the folder
deletes all the audio files
as well as Songs in the
folder. Use of separate
USB flash drives — one for
Songs, one for audio files
— is highly recommended
for data protection.
However, at very least, you
should use separate
folders.

Song Delete/Folder Delete


These operations let you delete Songs and folders. (Only Songs created with the ELseries, such as the EL-900, cannot be deleted.)
Before proceeding, make sure to confirm from the AUDIO display that no audio
files exist in the folder you are deleting, since the MDR display will not show any
audio files, even when the folder contains audio files.

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

2
3

Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song/folder you want to
delete.
For details on selecting a Song/folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
Use the Page buttons to select the TOOLS1 Page.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

4
5

164

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Press the [B] “DELETE” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button.
Press the appropriate [A] – [D] button corresponding to the
specific data you want to delete: “DELETE” or “PERF. ONLY.”
Selecting “DELETE” deletes the entire Song, and selecting “PERF.
ONLY” deletes only performance data in the Song.
When the operation is completed, the LCD returns to the SONG Page.

Creating folders


Connect a compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
Press the [MDR] button, then select the media/folder within which
you want to create the new folder.
For details on selecting a Song/folder, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

Press the [B] button to open the media/folder.

Call up the TOOLS1 Page with the Page buttons.

5
6

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

Press the [D] “CREATE FOLDER” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button.

Music Data Recorder (MDR)

Press the [C] “OK” button.
The newly created folder is automatically named “FOLDER_001,” or similar.
Up to 120 folders can be created.
For instructions on changing the folder name, see page 144.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

165

Converting to XG format


This function allows you to convert ELB-02 Song data to XG format data. You can
play back the data using XG devices. The converted XG Song data may not sound
the same as the original data.
Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If
memory space is insufficient, the Convert operation is not available.
Protected Songs cannot be converted to XG format.

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

1
2
3

Connect the USB flash drive containing the Song you want to
convert to XG format to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
Press the [MDR] button, then select the Song to be converted to
XG format.
Select the desired Song (having the
icon at left of its name).
For details on selecting a Song, see steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
Call up the TOOLS1 Page with the Page buttons.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

166

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Press the [C] “CONVERT” button.
A display for selecting conversion type appears.
You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button.

Press the [C] “CNV. XG” button.

7
8

After the CONVERT TO display is called up for selecting the
convert destination, select the destination of the converted data.
Select the USB flash drive or folder as the destination. See steps 2 and 3 on
page 135 for instructions on selecting the destination.

NOTE

Press the [C] “EXE.” button to start conversion.

A message will appear, prompting confirmation of the converted
data, and the converted Song is played back.
The song converted to XG format is automatically named such as
“XGSONG001.”
For instructions on changing the Song name, see page 144.
For details on XG Songs, refer to “Playing Back XG Songs” on page 160.

Do not play the keyboard or
press any of the panel
controls during the
confirmation of the
conversion, since these
actions will be recorded to
the converted XGcompatible
Song.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

167

Checking the Remaining Memory


When a USB flash drive is selected on the TOOLS2 Page, pressing the
[INFORMATION] button calls up a display indicating the remaining memory in the
USB flash drive. When a Song is selected on the TOOLS2 page, pressing the
[INFORMATION] button calls up a display indicating the data size, amount of
Registration Banks, Song title, composer of the Song, etc. The indicated items differ
depending on what is selected.
Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 127)

1
2

Connect the USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
Press the [MDR] button, then select a Song or USB flash drive.
For details on selecting a Song or USB flash drive, see steps 2 and 3 on
page 135.

Call up the TOOLS2 Page with the Page buttons.

Press the [C] “INFORMATION” button to call up the information.

6
Music Data Recorder (MDR)

When a USB flash drive is selected:
REMAIN: Remaining memory in the USB flash drive
ID:
Displays “Found” or “Missing” to indicate if the USB flash drive can handle
the Protected Song for ELB series or ELS series or not. “Found” indicates
the USB flash drive can handle the data, while “Missing” indicates that it
cannot.

When a Song is selected:
SIZE: Song data size
BANK: Amount of Registration Banks

168

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

7 Audio
The convenient [AUDIO] button allows you to play back audio files (.WAV) saved to a USB flash
drive. Moreover, since you can record your performances and recordings as audio data (.WAV) to
a USB flash drive, it is possible to play back the files on computer, share them with your friends,
and record your own CDs to enjoy as well.

Audio file

USB flash drive

Audio file

Computer

External
audio device

Compatible USB flash drives
Please make sure to use the compatible USB flash drives listed in the Compatible USB Device List downloadable
from the Yamaha website:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/recalling operations to abort, etc. Before using a USB flash
drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB Device” on page 132.
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to data, follow the notices below.
• Yamaha recommends that you format a USB flash drive (page 133), after checking if the USB flash drive does not contain any
important data, and to use it only for audio recording/playback. Using MDR Songs and audio data together in the same drive
may cause severe fragmentation of the USB flash drive, and may stop audio recording/playback altogether.
• Insert the USB flash drive firmly and take care that the USB flash drive does not loosen from the connection from sudden
shaking while performing, etc. during audio recording/playback. If the USB flash drive is disconnected while recording, it may
result in data corruption in the USB flash drive.

1 Recording Your Performance as Audio
NOTE

Audio Recording
With this method, recorded performances are saved to a USB flash drive as an audio file.
An Audio file is a recording of the performed sound itself. Since it is saved in stereo WAV
format of normal CD quality resolution (44.1kHz/16bit), it can be transmitted to and
played on portable music players by using a computer. You can also record the sound of
an external device since all the sounds produced via your keyboard performance and the
sound input from the [AUX IN] jack will be recorded.
Keep in mind, however, that Audio recording cannot be used to save Registrations. If you
want to save Registrations, perform the “Recording” operation described on page 138 in
chapter 6.

When recording audio that is
input from the [AUX IN] jack
to the USB flash drive, the
output volume of the external
audio device connected to
this instrument cannot be
controlled by the Electone.
Adjust the volume level from
the control on the external
audio device.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

169

Try recording your performance as an audio file to a USB flash drive.
Maximum amount of recording time is 60 minutes per recording, though this may
be less depending on the capacity of the particular USB flash drive.
NOTE
The file extension does not
appear in the Electone
display. However, it can be
viewed on a computer.

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 169)

NOTE
Songs you've created on the
Electone will not be shown in
the AUDIO Display even
when the USB flash drive
contains Songs.

NOTE
The “new audio” file is a
blank audio file automatically
created in the USB flash
drive/folder, if the number of
the audio files in the USB
flash drive/folder is less than
120.

File format that can be recorded
.wav — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16-bit resolution, stereo

1
2

Audio

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Press the [AUDIO] button located at the top right on the panel to
call up the AUDIO display.
AUDIO Display

170

Connect a compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.

Select the blank audio file “new audio” for recording your
performance.
To find “new audio,” press the [B] “
” button in the display of step 2 to
open the USB flash drive, then select “new audio” by using the DATA
CONTROL dial.
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer
to steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

Press the [C] “REC.” button to engage the Record Standby status.

Start recording by pressing the [C] “RECORD” button, and then
start your performance.
When recording begins, the elapsed recording time is shown in the lower left of
the AUDIO RECORD display.
Once the elapsed recording time is shown, you can load the Registration or play
the Song with the MDR.

NOTICE
Never attempt to
disconnect the USB flash
drive or turn the power off
during recording. Doing so
may corrupt the USB flash
drive data or the recording
data.

Elapsed
recording time

6
7

When you finish playing, press the [D] “FINISH” button.
Recording stops and the audio file to which your performance is recorded is
automatically named and selected in the AUDIO display.
To hear your newly recorded performance, press the [C] “PLAY”
button twice.

Reference Page
Deleting files/Renaming files
(page 176)

AUDIO PLAY Display [PLAY Page]

Audio

7
Recording the Song playback as audio file
Once you've recorded your performance as a Song using MDR function, you can record
the playback of the Song as an audio file.

1
2
3
4

Connect two compatible USB flash drives, one containing the
Song, and another for recording audio files, to the USB TO
DEVICE terminals.
Start audio recording (perform steps 2 – 5 above.)
Select the Song on the MDR Display, then start playback of the
Song.
Playback the Song to the end of the Song.
Stop the audio recording (perform steps 6 and 7 above).

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

171

2 Playing Back Audio Files
NOTE
This instrument cannot play
back DRM protected files.

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 169)

NOTE
Songs you've recorded
using the MDR function on
this Electone and Protected
Songs will not be shown in
the AUDIO Display, even
when the USB flash drive
contains Songs.

NOTE
The “new audio” file is a
blank audio file automatically
created in the USB flash
drive/folder, if the number of
the audio files in the USB
flash drive/folder is less than
120.

7
Audio

172

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Try playing back audio files from a USB flash drive connected to this instrument.
File format that can be played back
.wav — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16-bit resolution, stereo

1
2

Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the audio file
to be played back to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
Press the [AUDIO] button located at the top right on the panel to
call up the AUDIO display.
AUDIO Display

Select the desired audio file for playback.
To simply play an existing audio file, select the desired audio file (containing
data), referring to the audio file name and icon “
.”
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer
to steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

Press the [C] “PLAY” button to call up the PLAY Page of the AUDIO
PLAY display.
Select the PLAY Page with the page buttons if another page is shown.
AUDIO PLAY Display
[PLAY Page]

5
6

NOTE
AUDIO PLAY display
consists of two different
pages: “PLAY” or “SET.”
(Setting). Use the Page
buttons to select the
appropriate page.

Press the [C] “PLAY” button to start playback.
When playback begins, the elapsed time is shown in the lower left of the
display.
Press the [D] “FINISH” button to stop playback.
The display returns to the AUDIO display.

NOTICE
Never attempt to
disconnect the USB flash
drive or turn the power off
during playback. Doing so
may corrupt the USB flash
drive data.

Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause


Audio

Rewind and Fast Forward:
During audio playback (or when paused), press the [A] “REW” (Rewind) button or
[B] “FF” (Fast forward) button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired
position. When the button is released, playback is paused at the desired position. To
resume playback from the point you’ve reversed or advanced to, press the [C]
“PLAY” button.

Pause:
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the audio file press the [C] “PAUSE”
button. To resume playback from the point at which the audio file was paused, press
the [C] “PLAY” button again.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

173

Changing the Volume, Tempo and Pitch


You can change the volume, tempo and pitch of the audio file as the file is playing.

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 169)

1
2
3

Connect the compatible USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal.
Press the [AUDIO] button.

Select the desired audio file for playback.
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer
to steps 2 and 3 on page 135.

Press the [C] “PLAY” button to call up the AUDIO PLAY display.
Select the PLAY Page with the page buttons if another page is shown.
AUDIO PLAY Display
[PLAY Page]

7
Audio

Press the Page buttons to select the “SET.” (Setting) Page.

1
2
3

In this Page, you can make other audio playback settings.

174

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

1 To adjust the Volume:
Press the [A] button to select “VOLUME,” then adjust the value by using the DATA
CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [A] button.
Range: 0 – 127

2 To Change the Tempo:

NOTE

Press the [B] button to select “TEMPO,” then adjust the value by using the DATA
CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [B] button. The value can be adjusted
from 75% to 125% and the default value is 100%. Higher values result in a faster tempo.
If you select another audio file, this setting will be restored to the default value.

Changing the playback
tempo or pitch of an audio
file may change its tonal
characteristics.

3 To Change the Pitch:
Press the [C] button to select “PITCH,” then adjust the value by using the DATA
CONTROL dial or by successively pressing the [C] button. This let you shift the pitch
of an audio file in semitone steps (from -12 to 12). If you select another audio file, this
setting will be restored to the default value (0).

After setting, go back to the PLAY Page with the Page buttons, and
then play the audio file to hear and check the changes you’ve
made in the SET. Page.

If you are satisfied with the sound, press the [D] “FINISH” button.
Audio playback is stopped (if the file is being played back) and the display
returns to the AUDIO display.

7
Audio

NOTE
Volume, tempo and pitch
changes are temporary;
these values revert to their
defaults when the power is
turned off and then back on
again.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

175

Deleting the File / Changing the File Name


You can delete the file or change the file name.

Reference Page
Compatible USB flash drives
(page 169)

1
2
3
4

Connect the compatible USB flash drive containing the audio files
to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
Press the [AUDIO] button.

Select the desired audio file.
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs, refer
to steps 2 and 3 on page 135.
Press the [D] “TOOL” button to call up the AUDIO TOOLS Page.
In this Page, you can delete or rename the audio file.
AUDIO TOOLS Display

1
2

1 To delete the file:

Audio

Press the [B] “DELETE” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of the
operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL”
button. If you want to delete the file, press the [C] “DELETE” button. The audio file will
be deleted and the display returns to the AUDIO display.
Reference Page
Changing the Song/Folder
Name (page 144)

2 To rename the file:
Press the [C] “CHANGE NAME” button to call up the rename display. For details on
how to enter characters, refer to the “Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144.
After entering the characters, press the [D] “FINISH” button to call up a message
prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the operation at this point by
pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button. To finalize the name, press the [C] “CHANGE”
button. The audio file will be renamed and the display returns to the AUDIO display.

To exit from the AUDIO TOOLS Page, press the [D] “FINISH” button.

176

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

8 Footswitches
These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and
switch the effects on/off, without needing to take your hands from the keyboard. The Electone has
two Footswitches on the expression pedal.

Left Footswitch

Right Footswitch
Expression Pedal

1 Right Footswitch
The Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. For details on the
Registration Shift function and Right Footswitch, see “Registration Shift” on
page 121.

2 Left Footswitch
The Left Footswitch can be set to control one of three functions: Rhythm, Glide, or
Rotary Speaker. Instructions for setting the Left Footswitch (in the FOOT SWITCH
(LEFT) Page) are given here.

Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button.

NOTE
Pressing the [FOOT
SWITCH] button calls up one
of two different displays:
REGIST SHIFT (RIGHT) or
FOOT SWITCH (LEFT). Use
the Page buttons to select
the appropriate display.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

177

Call up the FOOT SWITCH (LEFT) display.
Use the page buttons to select page 3.
FOOT SWITCH (LEFT)
Display

1 OFF
2 RHYTHM
3 GLIDE
4 ROTARY SPEAKER

Reference Page
Rhythm Structure (page 70)

In this page, you can assign which function the Left Footswitch will control:
Rhythm, Glide, or Rotary Speaker. Each press of the [A] button selects the
functions in sequence: Off  Rhythm Glide Rotary Speaker. When Off is
selected here, the Left Footswitch is inactive.
1 Off
Control with the Left Footswitch is disabled.

2 Rhythm
When this is selected, one of the control settings appears below. Press the [B] button as
necessary to select the desired control setting.

2 -1 STOP
2 -2 BREAK
2 -3 MAIN A – MAIN D

2 -4 INTRO 1 – INTRO 3

Footswitches

2 -5 ENDING 1 – ENDING 3
2 -6 OFF

2 - 1 Stop
Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Left Footswitch.

2 - 2 Break
This function corresponds to the [BREAK] button on the panel. When you
press the Left Footswitch, the Break section is played.

178

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

2 - 3 Main A – Main D
These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the
panel. For example, when “MAIN A” is selected in this display and you press
the Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A.

2 - 4 Intro 1 – Intro 3
These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For
example, when “INTRO1” is selected in this display and you press the Left
Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1.

2 - 5 Ending 1 – Ending 3
These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel.
For example, when “ENDING1” is selected in this display and you press the
Left Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the ending
pattern is played, the rhythm stops.

2 - 6 Off
Control with the Left Footswitch is disabled.

3 Glide
This lets you control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch. Pressing the Left
Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a half-step
and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original.
When the Glide setting is chosen, two separate Glide pages are available, with the
current page number shown at the top right side of the display. You can select the pages
by using the Page buttons.
FOOT SWITCH (LEFT) Display
[Glide Page 3]

3-1

3-2

8
Footswitches

[Glide Page 4]

3 - 1 Time
Determines the speed of the Glide function, or how gradually the pitch returns
to normal when the Left Footswitch is released. Higher settings produce
slower pitch changes.
Range: 1 – 5

3 - 2 Lead 1/2, Upper1/2, Lower 1/2
Turn on the desired Voice section(s) for which the Glide function is to be
applied by pressing the corresponding [A] – [D] buttons. Each press of the
corresponding button toggles between on and off.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

179

Reference Page
Rotary Speaker (page 60)

8
Footswitches

180

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

4 Rotary Speaker
You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) by using the Left Footswitch. When
the “ROTARY SPEAKER” is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the
Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds to the “Speed
Control” in the Rotary Speaker display. To use this function, you’ll need to make the
appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section. For details, see page 60.

9 Transpose and Pitch Controls
There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch.
Transpose allows you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the
tuning. Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display.

Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears.

Select Page 2 of the Utility display by pressing the Page buttons.

1
2

In this page, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings.
Press the [A] button to change the Transpose setting, or press [B] button to
change the Pitch setting.
NOTE

1 Transpose
Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half steps
(semitones).
Range: -6 – +6

2 Pitch
Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch by 0.2
Hz. The default Pitch setting is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3).
Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz

You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice
Condition display. (See page 58 for details.)

These are overall pitch
controls; the actual pitch of a
Voice section will be affected
accordingly and may differ if
that Voice section’s pitch has
been changed. For example,
if the Transpose value is set
to “+1” here and the
Transpose value for Upper
Keyboard Voice 1 is set to
“+1” in the Voice Condition
display, the overall pitch of
the instrument becomes
“+1,” but the Upper
Keyboard Voice 1 pitch
setting becomes “+2.”

NOTE
The Transpose setting here
does not affect XG Songs
(page 160).

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

181

10 Connections
On the underside and right side of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with
various input/output terminals and miscellaneous controls, the functions of which are described
below.

1 Accessory Jacks and Controls
This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the Electone. For
details on connecting to external devices, see page 184.

Reference Page
Outputting the sound of an
external device through the
built-in speakers of the
Electone (page 184)

Reference Page
Playing the Sounds of the
Electone Through an
External Audio System
(page 184)

Reference Page
Using Headphones
(page 19)

182

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

1 [AUX IN] (stereo mini) jack
For connection to an external device. The signal from the connected external device
sounds from the Electone’s built-in speakers.
2 AUX OUT [L/L+R], [R] (standard phone) jacks
This pair of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker system.
The output level can be controlled with the MASTER VOLUME dial.
3 [PHONES] jack
For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected to this
jack, sound to the Electone’s built-in speaker system is automatically cut off, allowing
you to play without disturbing others.

4 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal
For connecting a USB flash drive. You can save data you’ve created on the
instrument to the USB flash drive. You can also use this to connect a USB wireless
LAN adaptor (sold separately) for connecting the instrument to an iPhone/iPad via
wireless LAN.

Reference Page
• Connecting a USB Device
(page 132)
• Connecting to an iPhone/
iPad (page 192)

Front (keyboard side)

5 MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals
For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also
use these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface.
6 [USB TO HOST] terminal
For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To connect to a computer, make
sure that an appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the computer.

Reference Page
• Controlling External MIDI
Devices from the Electone
(page 185)
• Controlling the Electone
from an External Device
(page 185)
• What is MIDI (page 187)
• Connection with Computer
(page 186)

7 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal
Same as “4 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.”

Connections

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

183

CAUTION
Before connecting the
instrument to other
electronic components,
turn off the power of all the
components. Also, before
turning any components
on or off, make sure to set
all volume levels to
minimum (0). Otherwise,
electrical shock or damage
to the components may
occur.

NOTICE
To avoid damage to the
devices, first turn on the
power to the instrument,
then to the external device.
When turning off the
power, first turn off the
power to the external
device, then to the
instrument.

Connection Examples — External

2 Devices

Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an
External Audio System


By using the AUX OUT jacks, you can connect your Electone to external speakers. If
you’re connecting the Electone to a mono device, use only the AUX OUT [L/L+R]
jack (standard phone).

NOTICE
Do not route the output
from the AUX OUT jacks to
the [AUX IN] jack. If you
make this connection, the
signal input at the [AUX IN]
jack is output from the AUX
OUT jacks. These
connections could result in
a feedback loop that will
make normal performance
impossible, and may even
damage both pieces of
equipment.

AUX OUT [L/L+R]

Speaker (Left)

[R]

Speaker (Right)

By connecting the Electone to an external audio device instead of speakers, you can
record your Electone performance to that device.

NOTE
Use audio cables and
adaptor plugs having no
(zero) resistance.

Outputting the sound of an external device through
the built-in speakers of the Electone

NOTICE
To avoid damage to the
devices, first turn on the
power to the external
device, then to the
instrument. When turning
off the power, first turn off
the power to the
instrument, then to the
external device.

By connecting a cable from the external audio device to the [AUX IN] jack, you can
play back the sound of the external device via the speakers of the Electone.

External audio device

NOTE

Connections

Use audio cables and
adaptor plugs having no
(zero) resistance.

[AUX IN]
Stereo mini plug

Stereo mini plug

Playback sound

184

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone


You can use the Electone to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone
generator), combining them with the Electone and letting you create even richer,
more multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI
keyboard must match the transmit channels on your Electone.)
The Electone transmits a variety of performance messages along with note
information as digital data, including values that indicate how far the expression
pedal is pressed down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected
external device responds to these messages depends on the particular device.

NOTE
When you are using the
MDR, MIDI data cannot be
transmitted.

Tone generator

MIDI [OUT]

MIDI IN

MIDI cable

MIDI messages

MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the [USB TO HOST] terminal is
used.
MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB
wireless LAN adaptor is connected.

Controlling the Electone from an External Device


You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of
your Electone and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit
channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your
Electone.)

NOTE
When you are using the
MDR, MIDI data cannot be
transmitted.

MIDI keyboard or synthesizer

MIDI [IN]

MIDI OUT

10
Connections

MIDI cable

MIDI messages

MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the [USB TO HOST] terminal is
used.
MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB
wireless LAN adaptor is connected.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

185

3 Connection with Computer
NOTE
When you are using the
MDR, MIDI data cannot be
transferred to/from the
computer.

By using the [USB TO HOST] terminal or MIDI terminals, you can connect the
Electone and computer enabling the MIDI communication between both. Install the
USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then make the MIDI connection between the
Electone and computer. Regarding the USB-MIDI driver, you can download the
latest version from the Yamaha website:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Connecting your Electone to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical
possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score
writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your
original Electone song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share
songs with your friends. You can also control the Electone from the computer, for
example, by playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your
Electone.

Using the [USB TO HOST] terminal


Using the Electone’s [USB TO HOST] terminal and a standard USB cable, connect
the Electone and the computer.
Computer

[USB TO HOST]

USB cable

MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the [USB TO HOST] terminal is
used.
MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled when the USB
wireless LAN adaptor is connected.
Precautions when using the [USB TO HOST] terminal
When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe
the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or
losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application
software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again.
NOTICE
• Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used.
• Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, disable any power-saving
mode of the computer (such as suspend, sleep, standby).
• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the [USB TO HOST]
terminal.
• Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/
unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

10
Connections

- Quit any open application software on the computer.
- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing
notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.)

• While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or
more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on
again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

186

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

4 MIDI
This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use
MIDI on your Electone.

What is MIDI?


No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”
In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a
grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are
easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some
strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note
sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?
Acoustic guitar note production

Digital instrument note production
Internal amp
L

Tone generator

Internal amp

(Electric circuit)

Playing the
keyboard

Pluck a string and the body
resonates the sound.

Based on playing information from the keyboard, a
sampled note stored in the tone generator is played
through the speakers.

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note
(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is
played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the
speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis
for note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the
Electone keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the
electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what
Voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it
released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to
the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the
stored sampled note.
Example of Keyboard Information
01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key)

60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed) &
Note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)

Velocity (about how strong)

120 (strong)

10
Connections

Voice number (with what Voice)

As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice
selection are handled as MIDI events.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

187

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments
to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control
Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.

MIDI Messages of the Electone


MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System
Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the
keyboard for a specific channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several
MIDI devices to communicate with each other.

Channel Messages
Each time you play the keyboard on the Electone, channel messages (indicating
which keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a specific channel.
Similarly, the Electone can be played remotely when receiving this data from an
external keyboard.
Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127. The
reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60.
Note Off: Generated when a key is released.
Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127.
NOTE
Yamaha website address is
on page 9 in this Owner’s
Manual.

For more detailed information, refer to the “MIDI Reference” document,
downloadable from the Yamaha website (page 9).
 Program Change
Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With
these messages you can change the Registrations of the Electone.
For more detailed information, refer to the “MIDI Reference” document,
downloadable from the Yamaha website (page 9).
 Control Change
Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning,
modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters,
through specific Control Change numbers.
For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the
Electone, refer to the “MIDI Reference” document, downloadable from the Yamaha
website (page 9).

System Messages

Connections

 System Exclusive Messages
System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration
data.

188

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Channels


MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16,
the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously
sent over one MIDI cable.
Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its
broadcasts over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different
programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate
channel to watch the desired program.

Weather Report

NEWS

NEWS
2

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends
MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI
cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI
Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will
sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.

MIDI cable

MIDI Transmit channel 2

MIDI Receive channel 2

The receive channel of the Electone is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard,
channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means
that when you are using another MIDI device to play the Electone’s Voices, you must
set the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive
channel(s) of the Electone. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard
(Upper, Lower and Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 191 for more information.

Connections

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

189

5 MIDI Control
When you connect your Electone with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer
or computer), you can determine how the Electone controls that MIDI device, or
how the Electone is controlled.

To select the MIDI page:

1
2

Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears. The MIDI Pages are found on Pages 4 – 5.
Use the PAGE buttons to select Pages 4 – 5.
Internal/External Display

1
2
3

Internal/External
Switches control over the displayed items between the Electone (Internal) or
the connected device (External).
1 Lead1
Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voice 1.
Successive presses of the [A] button alternates between Internal and External.
Internal: Lead Voice 1 is played from the Upper Keyboard of the Electone. (If the
To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower Keyboard.)
External: Lead Voice 1 is played from the connected instrument via MIDI
channel 4.

2 Synchro
Determines the source of the timing control, for rhythm synchronization
purposes.
Successive presses of the [B] button alternates between Internal and External.

10
Connections

Internal: Pressing the Rhythm [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button on the
panel enables control of and synchronization to any connected devices
(e.g., sequencer, etc.).
External: Starting the rhythm of a connected rhythm machine also starts the
rhythm of the Electone.

190

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

3 Expression
Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this control
is set to Auto.
Successive presses of the [C] button alternate among Auto, Internal and External.
Auto:
Internal and External is automatically switched.
Internal: You can manually control the expression pedal even during MDR.
playback.
External: While playing the MDR or receiving MIDI messages, the expression
pedal has no effect. (The volume is controlled by the recorded data in a
USB flash drive or received MIDI data.)

MIDI Out Channel Display

1
2
3
4

For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted.
Any channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each keyboard, the Upper
Keyboard, the Lower Keyboard and the Pedalboard. The MIDI messages on
each keyboard will be sent over the channels set here. You must set the
transmit channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device.
1 Upper Keyboard
You can select the channel for the Upper Keyboard.
Press the [A] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the
setting.

2 Lower Keyboard
You can select the channel for the Lower Keyboard.
Press the [B] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the
setting.

3 Pedalboard
You can select the channel for the Pedalboard.
Press the [C] button to select the item, then use the DATA CONTROL dial to select the
setting.

4 Rhythm
Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the Electone.
Rhythm start/stop messages can be filtered on the Electone.
Successive presses of the [D] button alternate between being transmitted (FILTER
OFF) and not transmitted (FILTER ON).

Connections

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

191

6 Connecting to an iPhone/iPad
NOTE
Yamaha website address is
on page 9 in this Owner’s
Manual.

You can connect a smart device such as an iPhone or iPad to the instrument. By
using an application tool on your smart device, you can take advantage of convenient
functions and get more enjoyment out of this instrument.
 For details on connections, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the
website (page 9).
 For information about compatible smart devices and application tools, access the
following page:
http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/

NOTE
MIDI and [USB TO HOST]
terminals are automatically
disabled when the USB
wireless LAN adaptor is
connected.

Reference Page

Wireless LAN settings


• Initialize the settings in the
wireless LAN settings
(page 200)

Start wireless connection according to the instructions in the “iPhone/iPad
Connection Manual” on the website, then make sure to make appropriate setups
from the following instructions: “Display the Networks and connecting to the access
point,” “Automatic Setup by WPS,” “Manual Setup” or “Connecting by the Adhoc
Mode.” Refer to pages 192 – 196 in this Owner’s Manual, then set up as required.
If there is no access point, follow the instructions in “Connecting by the Adhoc
Mode” (page 196).

NOTICE

Connections

Do not place your iPhone/
iPad in an unstable
position. Doing so may
cause the device to fall and
result in damage.

NOTE
Before using the USB [TO
DEVICE] terminal, be sure to
read “Precautions when
using the USB [TO DEVICE]
terminal” on page 132.

192

The USB wireless LAN adaptor lets you connect the Electone to an iPhone/iPad
wirelessly. For details about the USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately), contact
your nearest Yamaha representative or the distributor listed at the end (or
beginning) of this manual. Or you can access the following website and contact
Yamaha support at your location.
http://www.yamaha.com/contact/
To connect the Electone to an iPhone/iPad wirelessly, follow the instructions in the
“iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website, and also refer back to the
Owner’s Manual (this book) for the specific Wireless LAN settings (below) which
you’ll need to make for wireless connection.

• Wireless LAN Detailed
Settings (page 198)

When you use the
instrument along with an
application on your
iPhone/iPad, we
recommend that you first
set “Airplane Mode” to
“ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to
“ON” on your iPhone/iPad
in order to avoid noise
caused by communication.

Connection with a USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold
separately):

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Automatic Setup by WPS

Set the Wireless LAN mode to “INFRASTRUCTURE,” if necessary.
Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197.

Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless
LAN display.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 6.
WIRELESS LAN Display

3
4

Press the [B] “WPS” button.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. You can cancel the
operation at this point by pressing the [D] “CANCEL” button.
Press the [C] “OK” button to start WPS setup, then press the WPS
button on your access point within two minutes.
Appears when connection between the instrument and the
access point is done successfully.

After connection between the instrument and the access point is
done successfully, connect the iPhone/iPad to the access point by
referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”

10
Connections

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

193

Displaying available networks in the wireless LAN and
connecting to a network

1
2

Set the Wireless LAN mode to “INFRASTRUCTURE.”
Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197.
Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless
LAN display.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 6.

WIRELESS LAN Display

Network list

3
4

Press the [A] “UPDATE” button to call up the network list.
For a network with a lock icon ( ), you need to enter the proper password.
Connect the instrument to the desired network.

4-1

4-2

Select the desired network by using the DATA CONTROL dial, then
press the [C] “CNCT.” (Connect) button.
The name of the selected network will be fully shown in the display, letting you
confirm this is the network you want to use.
Press the [C] “CNCT.” (Connect) button.
• For a network without a lock icon:
Connecting starts.
• For a network with a lock icon ( ):
You need to enter the proper password. For details on how to enter characters,
refer to the “Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144. After entering the
password, press the [D] button to finalize the setting. This operation starts
connecting automatically.

10
Connections

Appears when connection between the instrument and
the access point is done successfully.

194

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

After connection between the instrument and the access point is
done successfully, connect the iPhone/iPad to the access point by
referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”

Manual Setup

1
2

Network list

Select “OTHER” at the bottom of the network list by using the
DATA CONTROL dial, then press the [C] “CNCT.” (Connect) button.
The OTHER display will be shown. The OTHER display consists of two
different pages that can be switched by using the Page buttons.

10
1

2
3

Connections

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

195

Set the SSID, Security and Password to the same as the settings
on the access point.
1 SSID
Press the [A] button on page 1 to call up the display for SSID input, then enter the SSID.
For details on how to enter the characters, refer to “Changing the Song/Folder Name”
on page 144. Up to 32 characters (half size), alphanumeric characters, marks can be
entered. After entering the SSID, press the [D] “EXIT” button to finalize the setting.

2 Security
Press the [A] button on page 2 to call up the Security list, then select the desired setting
by using the DATA CONTROL dial. Press the [C] “CHANGE” button to finalize the
setting.
NOTE

3 Password

The password cannot be set
when you select “NONE” for
the security setting.

Press the [B] button on page 2 to call up the display for Password input, then set the
password in the same way as SSID. Press the [D] “EXIT” button to finalize the setting.

Press the [C] “CNCT.” button to start connection.
Appears when connection between the instrument and
the access point is done successfully.

After connection between the instrument and the access point is
done successfully, connect the iPhone/iPad to the access point by
referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”

Connecting by the Adhoc Mode

1
Reference Page
Wireless LAN Detailed
Settings (page 198)

10
Connections

196

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Set the Wireless LAN mode to “ADHOC.”
Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode” on page 197.
The settings for the instrument are complete if you do not need to
change the SSID and so on. Connect the iPhone/iPad to the
instrument by referring to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”
You can change the SSID, Security, etc. from the ADHOC display
pages.

Wireless LAN Mode

Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor, then call up the Wireless
LAN option display.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then use the Page buttons to select Page 7.
The currently selected Mode name is shown.

Mode

Set the Wireless LAN mode.
You can set between two modes: INFRASTRUCTURE and ADHOC. Press the
[B] “MODE CHANGE” button to call up a message prompting confirmation of
the operation, then press the [C] “OK” button to execute the operation.

10
Connections

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

197

Wireless LAN Detailed Settings

Reference Page



Wireless LAN Mode
(page 197)

You can set the detailed settings for each mode: INFRASTRUCTURE and ADHOC.
No need to change or set the settings if you’ve done the connection between iPhone/
iPad and instrument.

Set the Wireless LAN mode, then call up the display for detailed
settings by pressing the [D] button in the Wireless LAN settings
display (Page 6) or the Wireless LAN option display (Page 7)

Wireless LAN settings display (Page 6)

INFRASTRUCTURE mode

ADHOC mode

INFRASTRUCTURE mode/
ADHOC mode

DETAIL display Page 1

ADHOC display Page 1

DETAIL display

DETAIL display Page 2

ADHOC display Page 2

10
ADHOC display Page 3
Connections

198

Wireless LAN option display (Page 7)

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

As necessary, set the detailed settings.
Press the [A] – [D] buttons corresponding to “CHANGE” or “SHOW” in the
display to call up the display for Setting/Input.

Wireless LAN
mode
INFRASTRUCTURE
mode

Display
DETAIL
display
Page 1

DETAIL
display
Page 2

ADHOC mode

ADHOC
display
Page 1

Item

Default setting

Setting/Input

Determines whether or not DHCP is used. If your router
is compatible with DHCP, select “ON (set DNS
automatically)” here.
Select on or off by using the DATA CONTROL dial then
press the [C] “CHANGE” button.

IP Address

0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask

0.0.0.0

Gateway

0.0.0.0

DNS Server 1

0.0.0.0

DNS Server 2

0.0.0.0

Set the wireless LAN detailed settings. IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS Server1, DNS Server2
can be set when DHCP is set to Off but cannot be set
when DHCP set to On. For details on confirmation and
changes in the setting of the access point on the router
side, refer to the owner’s manual for the product you
are using.
For details on how to enter characters, refer to the
“Changing the Song/Folder Name” on page 144. The
setting range is 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255.

DHCP

SSID

Channel

ADHOC
display
Page 2

Security

–

Password

–

ADHOC
display
Page 3

DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask

INFRASTRUCTURE
mode /
ADHOC mode

DETAIL
display

HOST NAME

MAC address

STATUS

ap-ELB-02-(last 6
characters of MAC
address in
lowercase); or
simply “ap-ELB-02,”
if MAC address
cannot be used.

To find the specific MAC address, see “MAC address”
below.
• SSID, Security and Password can be set in the same
way as those described in the section “Manual
Setup” on page 195. The last 6 characters of the
MAC address must be entered in lowercase.
• Channel can be selected by the DATA CONTROL
dial and set by pressing the button corresponding to
“CHANGE.”
• DHCP and IP Address can be set in the same way
as those of “INFRASTRUCTURE mode” in this table.
• Subnet Mask can be selected in the list.

ON
192.168.0.1
255.255.255.0
ELB-02-(last 6
characters of MAC
address in
lowercase); or
simply “ELB-02,” if
MAC address
cannot be used.

–

00000000

To find the specific MAC address, see “MAC address”
below.
Set the Host name. Up to 57 characters (half size)
including alphanumeric characters, the “_”
(underscore) and “-” (hyphen) character. For details on
how to enter characters, refer to the “Changing the
Song/Folder Name” on page 144. After entering the
characters, press the [D] “EXIT” button to finalize the
setting.
The last 6 characters of the MAC address must be
entered in lowercase.
Shows the MAC address of the USB wireless LAN
adaptor. You cannot change the MAC address here.
Shows the error code of network function.

10
Connections

Save the settings.
Press the [D] “EXIT” button. A message appears prompting confirmation of
operation when there is a change in the setting. Press the [C] “OK” button to
execute the operation, or press the [D] button to cancel. When the operation is
completed, the LCD returns to the previous display.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

199

Initialize the wireless LAN settings


Factory Set (page 27) does not affect the settings of the wireless LAN settings, which
can be initialized by the following procedure. Be careful when executing initialize,
since it erases all the wireless LAN settings and replaces them with the factory
defaults.

10
Connections

200

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the UTILITY display, then
select Page 7 by using the Page buttons.

Initialize the wireless LAN setting.
Press the [C] button. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
Press the [C] “OK” button to execute the operation, or the [D] button to cancel.

Glossary of Terms


Access point

A device which acts as a base station when transmitting data by
wireless LAN.
Some access points are combined with modem functions.

Ad Hoc mode

Communication method for performing data communication with the
terminal and other devices directly without using a relay device, such
as an access point of a wireless LAN.

DHCP

A standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level
network configuration information can be dynamically and
automatically assigned each time the computer and the instrument
connect to the Internet.

DNS SERVER

A server that maps names to actual IP addresses of devices
connected to a network.

GATEWAY

A Gateway is a link between two computer programs or systems.

Infrastructure
mode

Communication method for performing data communication with
each terminal via a relay device, such as an access point of the
wireless LAN.

IP ADDRESS

A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a
network that indicate the device’s location on the network.

LAN

Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that
connects a group of computers at a single location (such as an office
or home) by means of a special cable.

router

A device that allows multiple devices (e.g., computers, your Yamaha
instrument) to share the same Internet connection.

Site

Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are
opened together. For example, the collection of web pages whose
addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the
Yamaha site.

SSID

A name used to identify a particular access point, or the wireless
networks set as the access point.
The structure for dividing a large-scale network.

Wireless LAN

A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cablefree connection.

WPS

A structure to easily make a setting of wireless LAN by pushing only
the WPS buttons of an access point and the wireless LAN device.

10
Connections

SUBNET
MASK

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

201

11 Appendix
Assembly Instructions
CAUTION
• Assemble the unit on a hard and flat floor with ample space.
• Be careful not to confuse or misplace the parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please
assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence described here.
• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.
• Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect screws can
cause damage or malfunction of the product.
• Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of each unit.
• To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.

1
2

Open the package, take out the two styrofoam pads from the both sides of the package, and
carefully place the main unit on top of the pads as shown.
Take out all parts from the package.
Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided. When you take out the Speaker Unit, always
hold the bottom of the Speaker Unit, not holding the Grill Net.
Music Rest

Dust Cover

Main Unit

Styrofoam pads
Take out the styrofoam pads, and
place the Main Unit on top of the
pads.
Grill Net
Attached to the Speaker
Unit

Bundled pedal
cord inside.

Speaker Unit

Bench

Bench Board

Sideboard
(Left)

Pedalboard Unit

Assembly parts

Power cord

A
5 x 16 mm

x4
Cord holders x 4

B
Legs: 4 pcs.

202

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

5 x 12 mm

Screw caps x 4

Sideboard
(Right)

Mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard
unit.

4-3

Be sure not to confuse the Right and Left
Sideboards.

3-1
3-2
3-3

Untie (at three points) and straighten out the
bundled pedal cord.
Raise the Pedalboard as shown in the illustration
below.

While holding the Sideboard(s) to the Speaker
unit, fasten the four screws (B) from the rear, to
secure the Speaker unit to the Sideboards. Cover
the four screw holes on the rear side with the
corresponding screw caps.
Push the Sideboard
toward the Speaker unit

Push the Sideboard
toward the Speaker unit

Position each screw hole on both the Pedalboard
and Sideboards as shown in the illustration and
mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard using
four screws (B; two screws on each Sideboard).

Screw caps

Screw
caps

Push the Sideboard
toward the Pedalboard

4
4-1

4-2

Stand the Pedalboard after securing the screws.

Make sure to place the connector of the power
cord at the front side, and the plug of the power
cord at the back side.

Mount the Speaker Unit onto the
Sideboards.

Clamp the holder shut
after inserting the cord.

Remove the Grill Net from the Speaker Unit.

6
With the help of another person, hold the Speaker
unit horizontally, and slide it from the rear into
place along the brackets.

Affix the two cord holders to the top
surface of the Speaker unit, then insert the
Power cord in the holders as shown in the
illustration.

6-1

Mount the Main Unit.
As shown in the illustration, hold the Main Unit
horizontally (with two people), and mount the Main
Unit. Be sure to place your hands at least 15 cm
from either end of the main unit when positioning it.

15 cm or further in

CAUTION
Take care not to drop the Speaker unit or to pinch your
finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Sideboard.

CAUTION

Appendix

3-4

Take care not to drop the Main unit or to pinch your
finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Main unit.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

203

6-2

Use the four screws (A) to fasten the Main unit to
the Sideboards as shown in the illustration.

Plug the power cord into the AC IN jack on
the bottom surface of the main Unit.

Connect the Pedalboard cord and Speaker
cord to the Main Unit.
Remove the protective film applied to each
connector of the cords. Make sure that the latches
on each connector of the cords face toward you,
and connect them to each socket securely until
the latch is set. Once connected securely, the
connector cannot be accidentally disconnected,
even if you pull the connector gently downward. (If
disconnected, the pedals will not function
properly.)

Fit the Grill Net onto the Speaker.
First, align the net with the bottom line, then
secure it to the speaker assembly.

Speaker cord
Pedalboard cord

To disconnect the
Pedalboard cord and
Speaker cord:
Press the bottom of the latch
to unlatch, then disconnect.

10 Affix the two cord holders to the inside of

the side board, then insert the Pedalboard
cord in the holders as shown in the
illustration.
Clamp the holder shut after
inserting the cord.

Fasten the Grill Net
by inserting the
knobs into the holes.

11
Appendix

204

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

11 Place the music rest on the Electone.

After completing the assembly, please
check the following items.
• Are there any parts left over?
→ Review all assembly procedures.
• Is the Electone clear of doors and other
movable fixtures?
→ Move the Electone to an appropriate location.
• Does the Electone make a rattling noise when
you shake it?
→ Tighten all screws.
• Can the Electone be turned on?
→ Confirm that the power cord plug is securely
connected to an appropriate power outlet.
• Does the Electone produce sounds?
→ How to produce sounds is described in “Quick
Introductory Guide.” Confirm that the Speaker cord
connector and the Pedalboard cord connector are
securely connected to each socket on the Main unit.

12 Turn on the Electone’s [P](Standby/On)

switch and confirm that the Electone can
be played, and that the assembly is
successful.

When moving the instrument
CAUTION
When moving the instrument, always hold the bottom of
the main unit. Do not hold the top portion. Improper
handling can result in damage to the instrument or
personal injury.
Do not hold here.

BENCH ASSEMBLY
Turn the bench board over and put the legs in place, one by
one, at the corners of the bench board, then tighten each
nut using the included wrench. Be sure to put the washer
between each leg and nut as shown.
Hold here.

Leg
Washer

Nut

CAUTION
If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when
you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly
diagrams and retighten all screws.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Bench
board

• Transporting
If you move to another location, you can transport the
instrument along with other belongings. You can move the
unit as it is (assembled), or you can disassemble the unit
down to the condition it was in when you first took it out of
the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it
up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject
the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. When
transporting the assembled instrument, make sure all
screws are properly tightened and have not been loosened
by moving the instrument.

205

Troubleshooting
Problem

Possible Cause and Solution

GENERAL OPERATION
The sound is not heard for about 10
seconds after turning the power on.

This is normal; the Electone takes a while to start up.

A click or pop is heard when the power is
turned on or off.

Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This is normal.

A cracking noise is sometimes heard.

Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an
electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this
occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible
from the device that seems to be the source of the problem.

Interference from radio, TV, or other
sources occurs.

This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an
amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone.

Noise is heard from the instrument’s
speakers or headphones when using the
instrument with an application on an
iPhone/iPad.

When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPhone/iPad,
we recommend that you first set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to
“ON” on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication.

The sound of the Electone causes
surrounding objects to resonate.

Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds,
resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass
windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume.

The sound is too small even when the
volume is set to its maximum.

• The MASTER VOLUME dial may be set around The minimum position. Turn it
clockwise (page 17).
• The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your toe
(page 17).
• The speaker cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the speaker cord to
the Main Unit (page 204).

The Pedal Voices do not sound, and the
expression pedal does not work.

The pedal cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the pedal cord plug to
the Main Unit (page 204).

The “Connection interrupted; problem
occurred in USB device.” message is
shown and the USB device does not
respond.

Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of a
problem. Disconnect the device from the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, then turn
on the power of the instrument.

The Electone panel does not function
normally or the content of the memorized
data has changed.

This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to
electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/
or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory
Set operation to reset the Electone.

VOICES/RHYTHMS

11
Appendix

206

When a key is pressed, two or more
Voices sound.

Perhaps the Voice of the Voice section 2 sounds as for the Lower Keyboard or
Pedalboard. Turn off the Voice of the Voice section 2 in the Voice display, or set
the volume setting to minimum after switching to the Voice section 2 (page 36).
As for the Upper Keyboard, the Lead Voice may sound in addition to the Voice
of the Voice section 2. Turn off the Lead Voice in the Voice display.

The pitch may sound excessively high on
the Pedalboard and low in the higher
registers of the Lower and Upper
keyboards.

This may occur when you compare the Electone’s sounds with that of a piano.
Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the
Electone is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges.

Some of the Voices may contain cracking
and/or noisy sounds.

You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely
added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind
instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Problem

Possible Cause and Solution

When too many keys are pressed, not all
of the notes sound.

Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower
Keyboards) is 10 notes.

Only one sound is heard when two notes
of the Lead or Pedal Voices are
simultaneously played.

For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that
only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time.

The Pedal Voices do not sound, even
though the volume is properly set.

• The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn off
the mode in the display (page 82).
• TO LOWER button in the Pedal Voice section is turned on. Turn the function
off (page 38).

When keys are pressed, the sounds of
percussion instruments are also heard.

The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the
function, be sure to turn it off (page 88).

Even though a User button’s rhythm has
been selected and started, the pattern
does not sound.

Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern
has not been saved to the selected User button.

EFFECTS
The Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch
Vibrato function do not operate.

• Adjust the Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato settings in the Voice
Condition display (page 55).
• Initial Touch, After Touch and Touch Vibrato are not applied to the Pedal
Voices on the Pedalboard.

The Reverb effect is not applied to the
desired Voice sections, even when the
REVERB button setting on the panel is
increased.

Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in the Voice
Condition Display (page 54).

The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be
heard, even when the “Speed Control” in
the Rotary Speaker display is on.

Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display (page 57).

ACCOMPANIMENT
The pitch in the Single Finger mode does
not change, even when pressing different
keys of the keyboard.

Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave
interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed
outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch.

While an Intro/Ending pattern is
automatically playing, the Lower
keyboard does not produce any sound,
even when the keys are played.

Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the
Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of
an Intro/Ending pattern.

The Accompaniment cannot be heard
even when an appropriate
Accompaniment type is selected and the
rhythm has been started.

• The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the
Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 81).

The harmony notes of the Melody On
Chord function cannot be heard.

The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the
volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices.

• All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on
(page 79).

REGISTRATION MEMORY
Certain functions have not been
memorized to Registration Memory.

Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 112.

MUSIC DATA RECORDER

Please make sure to use the compatible USB flash drives listed in the
Compatible USB Device List downloadable from the Yamaha website:
http://download.yamaha.com/

Appendix

The instrument does not recognize the
connected USB flash drive.

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

207

Problem
Recording or playback cannot be
performed.

Possible Cause and Solution
• The part may have been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY in
the PART 1 and PART 2 Pages.
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording
performance data is 1 MB.
• The USB flash drive is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect.

Recording is stopped before the
performance is finished.

• The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit.
Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs.
• When you overwrite the Song, the length of a subsequently recorded part
cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the
previously recorded Song, then record again (page 164).
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording
performance data is 1 MB.

An error message appears while entering
a folder name or song name.

• The Song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 characters.
• The Song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 146.
• The path name is too long. Reduce the layer or shorten the Song/folder
name to shorten the path (page 144).

The rhythm does not start at the
beginning of a recording, or stops in the
middle of the performance.

The MDR is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very
beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time
indicator appears in the display (page 138).

The USB flash drive cannot be formatted
when you want to format an unformatted
drive.

Recognizing an unformatted drive takes a few seconds after it is inserted. Wait
about 30 seconds, then try to format again.

An error message is shown when you
edit the Protected Edit Song.

Registrations from another Protected Song have been called up on the
Electone. Initialize the Registration (page 120) then select the Song you want
to edit.

The Song you've edited becones a
Protected Song.

Registrations from Protected Song has been called up on the Electone.
Initialize the Registration (page 120) then start the operations you want such
as Registration edit/saving or Song recording.

Audio
Recording or playback cannot be
performed.

• The USB flash drive is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect.

A “Data could not be saved” message is
shown and the recording is stopped.

The message will be shown when using the USB flash drive to which frequently
recording/deleting operations have been applied. Format the USB flash drive
(page 133), after checking if the USB flash drive does not contain any
important data, then try to use again.

11
Appendix

208

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

• The file format may not be compatible with the instrument. The only
compatible format is WAV.

Specifications
DIGITAL ORGAN

PRODUCT NAME

AWM

TONE GENERATION

Upper: 49 keys (C – C),
Lower: 49 keys (C – C),
Pedal: 20 keys (C – G)

KEYBOARD

BASIC (FSB)

Initial Touch

Upper, Lower

After Touch

Upper, Lower
601

Registration Menu
Registration Memory

Shift, Jump, User (1 Unit: 400 steps), Next Unit

Registration Shift
VOICE

Upper 1, Upper 2, Lead 1, Lead 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1,
Pedal 2

Voice Sections
Voice Buttons

Upper/Lower

VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET,
USER 1, TO LOWER (Lead 1),
SOLO (Lead 2)

Pedal

CONTRABASS, ELEC. BASS, TIMPANI, SYNTH BASS, USER 1,
TO LOWER
540

Rotary Speaker Control

RHYTHMS

Types

Hall 1 – 3, M, L, XG Hall 1 – 2,
Room 1 – 4, S, M, L, XG Room 1 – 3,
Stage 1 – 2, XG Stage 1 – 2,
Plate 1 – 2, XG Plate, GM Plate,
White Room, Atmosphere Hall, Acoustic Room,
Drums Room, Percussion Room,
Tunnel, Canyon, Basement

Depth

Upper 1 – 2, Lower 1 – 2, Lead 1 – 2,
Pedal 1 – 2, Percussion,
Accompaniment, Keyboard Percussion

Voice Section Effects

Reverb, Delay, ER/Karaoke, Chorus, Flanger, Phaser,
Tremolo/Auto Pan, Rotary Speaker, Distortion, Distortion+,
Amp Simulator, Wah, Dynamic, EQ/Enhancer, Pitch Change,
Miscellaneous, Thru

Rhythm Buttons

MARCH, WALTZ, SWING & JAZZ, POPS, R&B, LATIN,
WORLD MUSIC, BALLAD, ROCK, DANCE, USER 1, USER 2

Preset Rhythm Patterns
Parts
Sections
ACCOMPANIMENT

2.69 – 39.7 Hz, Slow, Stop
Upper 1, Upper 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1, Pedal 2

Sustain
Reverb

STRINGS, BRASS, WOODWIND, TUTTI, PAD, SYNTH, PIANO,
ORGAN, PERCUSSION, GUITAR, CHOIR, WORLD, USER 1,
USER 2

Lead

Preset Voices

EFFECT/
CONDITION

1 Unit 16 x 5
MEMORY, 1 – 16, DISABLE

Accompaniment Parts

368 (including the metronome)
Main Drum, Add Drum
INTRO 1 – 3, ENDING 1 – 3, MAIN/FILL IN A – D, BREAK,
Auto Fill

Chord 1 – 2, Pad, Phrase 1 – 2

Auto Bass Chord

OFF, Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C.
Memory: Lower, Pedal

Melody On Chord

Yes

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

REGISTRATIONS

Keyboard Type

209

KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION

1 Unit
Preset 1 – 2, User 1 – 40

Settings

Wonderland Kit, EL Kit, Standard Kit 1, Standard Kit 2,
Hit Kit, Room Kit, Rock Kit, Electro Kit, Analog Kit,
Dance Kit, Jazz Kit, Brush Kit, Symphony Kit,
Live! Studio Kit, House Kit, SFX Kit 1, SFX Kit 2,
Noise Kit, Pop Latin Kit, Arabic Kit, China Kit,
Orchestra Percussion

Kits

Yes

Assign
CONTROLS

Footswitch

Left

Right

-6 – +6

Transpose

A = 427.2 – 452.6 Hz, Default value: A = 440 Hz

Pitch
MIDI Control

Yes

MASTER VOLUME

Yes

MDR

Song Select: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Record,
Custom Play, Setting (Tempo/Part), Unit Edit
Tools: Create Folder, Change Song Name, Copy, Delete,
Conversion (XG format), Format, Information

Audio Recording/Playback

Play: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Volume, Tempo,
Pitch
Record: Stop, Record
Tools: Change Name, Delete
File Format: .wav (44.1kHz,16bit, stereo)

Utility

Language (English/Japanese), Disable Mode (Normal/Tempo),
LCD Contrast, Initialize

Display Select

VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., MDR, FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY,
AUDIO
Full Dot LCD (128 x 64 dots), Monochrome

Display
Sound System

Power
Amplifiers

(20W + 10W) x 2

Speakers

(16cm + 5cm) x 2
USB flash drive

Storage

PHONES
AUX OUT (VARIABLE, Standard phone): L/L+R, R
AUX IN (stereo mini phone)
MIDI IN/OUT
USB TO HOST
USB TO DEVICE x 2

Connectors

Dimensions (Width x Depth x Height),
Weight
Bench
Supplied Accessories

1113mm x 493mm x 924mm (Depth and Height with music rest:
509mm x 1103mm),
50 kg
596mm x 296mm x 580mm, 6.2 kg
Owner’s Manual (this book),
Playing the ELB-02 — Tutorial Guidebook,
Online Member Product Registration,
Music Rest, Dust Cover, Power Cord, Bench

* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the
Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same
in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Appendix

210

Registration Shift
Yes

Expression Pedal

OTHERS

Rhythm: Stop, Break, Main A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3
Glide: Upper 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Glide Time
Rotary Speaker

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Index
Numerics

[DISABLE] button ............................... 114

1 – 16 (Registration Memory) .............111

Disable mode ..................................... 114

Jacks and Controls ............................ 182

9 – 16 (Registration Memory) .............112

display .................................................. 25

Jump .................................................. 123

Display Language ................................ 27

A
[A] – [D] button .....................................25
A.B.C. (Auto Bass Chord) ....................82
Accompaniment ............................68, 79
Add Drum .............................................80
Adhoc Mode .......................................196
AEM ......................................................42

Display Page ........................................ 26
Display Select ...................................... 15
DISTORTION ................................. 57, 65
DISTORTION+ .............................. 57, 65
DYNAMIC ...................................... 57, 67

After Touch ...........................................55

Effect ............................................. 52, 57

AMP SIMULATOR ..........................57, 66

Effect List ............................................. 64

Articulation ............................................59

ENDING ............................................... 70

Assembly Instructions ........................202
Assign .................................................102

EQ/ENHANCER ............................. 57, 67
ER/KARAOKE ................................ 57, 64

Audio ..................................................169

Expression pedal ........................ 17, 177

Audio Recording ................................169

External .............................................. 190

Auto Articulation ............................42, 59
Automatic Accompaniment ...........68, 82

AUX IN ................................................182

Fast Forward (audio) .......................... 173

AUX OUT ............................................182

Fast Forward (Song) .......................... 157

Files .................................................... 131

Bank ..........................................113, 116

FILL IN .................................................. 70

Bass Chord ...........................................82

Fingered Chord .................................... 83

Feet ...................................................... 54

BREAK ..................................................70
Brilliance ...............................................55

C
Channel Messages .............................188
character ............................................145
Chord 1/Chord 2 ...................................80
CHORUS .......................................57, 64
Computer ............................................186
Connections .......................................182
Contrast of the Display .........................18
Controls ................................................52
Convert to XG .....................................166
Copy ...................................................161
Creating folders ..................................165
Custom A.B.C. ......................................83
Custom Play .......................................156

FLANGER ...................................... 57, 64
Folders ...................................... 131, 165

K
Keyboard ............................................. 29
Keyboard Percussion ................... 68, 88
Kit Assign List .................................... 105

L
language .............................................. 27
LCD ...................................................... 25
Lead Voice ........................................... 29
Left Footswitch ................................... 177
Lower Keyboard .................................. 30
Lower Keyboard Voice ........................ 30

M
M.O.C. (Melody On Chord) ................. 85
MAIN .................................................... 70
Main Drum ........................................... 80
Manual Setup ..................................... 195
MDR ................................................... 127
MDR Display ............................. 127, 128
MDR Recording ................................. 138
Melody On Chord ................................ 85
Memory ................................................ 84
Metronome .................................... 75, 78

Footswitches ...................................... 177

MIDI .......................................... 183, 187

Format .................................................... 7

MISCELLANEOUS ........................ 57, 67

Formatting a USB Flash Drive ............ 133
Functions and settings that cannot be
memorized ....................................... 112

G
Glide ................................................... 179
GM ......................................................... 7
GS .......................................................... 7

Mode (Rotary Speaker) ....................... 60
Music Data Recorder ......................... 127

N
Name ................................................. 144
Name (audio) ..................................... 176
networks ............................................ 194
Next Unit ................................... 126, 153
Numbered buttons (Registration Memory)
........................................................ 111

Headphones ........................................ 19

O
On/Off status of the Voices .................. 31

ID ........................................................ 168

DATA CONTROL dial ...........................25
DELAY ...........................................57, 64
Delay (Vibrato) ......................................56
Delete (Song/Folder) ..........................164
Deleting the File ..................................176
Depth (Reverb) .....................................62
Depth (Vibrato) .....................................56

INFRASTRUCTURE ............................ 197
Initial Touch .......................................... 55
Initialize the wireless LAN settings ..... 200
Initializing Registration Memory ......... 120
Initializing the Electone ........................ 27
Internal ............................................... 190
INTRO .................................................. 70

P
Pad ...................................................... 80

Page construction (MDR Display) ..... 128
Panning ................................................ 54
Part (Rhythm) ....................................... 79
Pause (audio) .................................... 173

Appendix

Pause (Song) ..................................... 157
Pedal Voice .......................................... 30

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

211

Pedalboard ...........................................30
PHASER .........................................57, 65

PHONES .............................................182

Scroll bar .............................................. 25

Phrase 1/Phrase 2 ................................80

Selecting a Song ................................ 134

Version ................................................. 28

Shift .................................................... 122

Vibrato ................................................. 56

Pitch (overall) ......................................181

Shift End ............................................. 126

Voice buttons ....................................... 33

Pitch (Voice section) .............................58

Single Finger ........................................ 83

Voice Condition ................................... 53

Slide ..................................................... 59

Voice Display ....................................... 31

Playback (audio) ................................172

Solo function ........................................ 39

Voice List ............................................. 42

Playback (Song Parts) ........................157

Song ................................................... 155

Voice section 1 .................................... 33

Playback (Song) .................................155

Song (selection) ................................. 134

Voice section 2 .................................... 36

Power Supply .......................................16

Song data size ................................... 168

[VOICE SECTION 2] button .......... 33, 36

PRESET ................................................57

Song icons ......................................... 130

Voice sections ..................................... 29

Preset (Vibrato) .....................................56

SONG Page ....................................... 129

Voices .................................................. 29

Preset Keyboard Percussion ................88

Speed (Rotary Speaker) ...................... 60

Volume ................................................. 17

Preset Keyboard Percussion List .........90

Speed (Vibrato) .................................... 56

Priority ...................................................59

Speed Control ...................................... 60

Volume (Accompaniment part of the
Rhythm) ............................................. 81

Protected Edit Song ...........................163

START (Rhythm) ................................... 71

Protected Original Song .....................163

Stop (Shift End) .................................. 126

Protected Songs .................................162

Super Articulation ................................. 42

Punch-in Recording ............................143

Sustain ................................................. 63
Synchro (MIDI) ................................... 190

SYNCHRO START ................................ 71

Random ..............................................159

System Messages .............................. 188

Recording (audio) ..............................169
Recording (MDR) ...............................138

Recording Each Part Separately ........140

Tempo (audio) .................................... 174

Registration Memory ..........................111

Tempo (MDR) ..................................... 158

Registration Menu ................................20

Tempo (Rhythm) .................................. 73

Registration Menu List ..........................22

THRU ............................................. 57, 67

Registration Shift ................................121

Time (Reverb) ...................................... 62

Registrations (load from a USB flash drive)
..........................................................154

To Lower function ................................. 38

Registrations (memorize) ...................111
Registrations (recall) ..........................113
Registrations (save to a USB flash drive)
................................................118, 147
Remaining Memory ............................168
Repeat Playback ................................159

Appendix

212

Pitch (audio) .......................................174

PITCH CHANGE ............................57, 67

Utility .................................................... 18

Save (Registration Memory) ............... 118

Top (Shift End) ................................... 126
Touch Vibrato ....................................... 55
Transpose (overall) ............................ 181
Transpose (Voice section) ................... 58
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN .................. 57, 65
Tune ..................................................... 58

REVERB .........................................57, 64

Type (Reverb) ...................................... 62

Reverb (Accompaniment part of the
Rhythm) ..............................................81

Reverb (Keyboard Percussion) ............89

Unit ..................................................... 147

Reverb (Overall) ...................................61

Units ................................................... 119

Reverb (Percussion part of the Rhythm)
...........................................................74

Upper Keyboard .................................. 29

Reverb (Voice) ......................................54

USB Device ........................................ 132

Upper Keyboard Voice ........................ 29

Rewind (audio) ...................................173

USB Flash Drives ............................... 132

Rewind (Song) ....................................157

USB TO DEVICE ................................ 183

Rhythm .................................................68

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal ................ 132

Rhythm buttons ....................................68

USB TO HOST .................................... 183

Rhythm Condition ..........................74, 79

USB wireless LAN adaptor ................ 192

Rhythm List ...........................................77

User (Registration Shift) ..................... 123

Rhythm Sequence ................................86

User (Vibrato) ....................................... 56

Right Footswitch .................................177

User buttons (Rhythm) ......................... 75

ROTARY SPEAKER .......................57, 65

User buttons (Voice) ............................ 39

Rotary Speaker .....................................60

User Keyboard Percussion ................ 101

Rotary Speaker (Footswitch) ..............180

User rhythm .......................................... 76

ELB-02 Owner’s Manual

Volume (audio) .................................. 174
Volume (Keyboard Percussion) ........... 89
Volume (Percussion part of the Rhythm)
................................................... 69, 74
Volume (Voice) ............................. 34, 54

W
WAH .............................................. 57, 66
Wireless LAN Mode ........................... 197
Wireless LAN settings ........................ 192
WPS ................................................... 192

X
XG .......................................................... 7
XG Songs ........................................... 160

About Using BSD-Licensed Software
The software used by this product includes components
that comply with the BSD license.
The restrictions placed on users of software released
under a typical BSD license are that if they redistribute
such software in any form, with or without modification,
they must include in the redistribution (1) a disclaimer of
liability, (2) the original copyright notice and (3) a list of
licensing provisions.
The following contents are displayed based on the
licensing conditions described above, and do not
govern your use of the product.

XySSL
Copyright © 2006-2008, Christophe Devine.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
*

Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of XySSL nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.

WPA Supplicant
Copyright © 2003-2009, Jouni Malinen and
contributors
All Rights Reserved.
This program is dual-licensed under both the GPL
version 2 and BSD license. Either license may be used
at your option.

License
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name(s) of the above-listed copyright
holder(s) nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
MALTA

NORTH AMERICA

Olimpus Music Ltd.
Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta
Tel: +356-2133-2093

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1,
Canada
Tel: +1-416-298-1311

NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/
LUXEMBOURG

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: +1-714-522-9011

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B –
Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP,
Brazil
Tel: +55-11-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,
Sucursal Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,
Madero Este-C1107CEK,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: +54-11-4119-7000

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal
en España
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231
Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain
Tel: +34-91-639-88-88

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki,
Greece
Tel: +30-210-6686260

SWEDEN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial
Scandinavia
JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: +46-31-89-34-00

VENEZUELA

Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A.
AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza,
Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela
Tel: +58-212-943-1877

DENMARK

Yamaha Music Denmark,
Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland
Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark
Tel: +45-44-92-49-00

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy
Antaksentie 4
FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland
Tel: +358 (0)96185111

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama,
P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama
Tel: +507-269-5311

NORWAY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch
Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway
Tel: +47-6716-7800

EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, U.K.
Tel: +44-1908-366700

ICELAND

Hljodfaerahusid Ehf.
Sidumula 20
IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: +354-525-5050

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0

CROATIA

Euro Unit D.O.O.
Slakovec 73
40305 Nedelisce
Tel: +38540829400

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen,
Branch Switzerland in Zürich
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: +41-44-3878080

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.
Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street,
Moscow, 121059, Russia
Tel: +7-495-626-5005

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: +43-1-60203900

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0

CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/
ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: +43-1-60203900

AFRICA

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA

Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.
Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa
1528 Sofia, Bulgaria
Tel: +359-2-978-20-25

Yamaha Music Europe
7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest,
77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France
Tel: +33-1-6461-4000
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy
Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: +39-02-93577-1

BRAZIL

BULGARIA

FRANCE

Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd.
Nikis Ave 2k
1086 Nicosia
Tel: + 357-22-511080
Major Music Center
21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy
P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus
Tel: (392) 227 9213

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,
Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971-4-801-1500

ITALY

Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José
Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México,
D.F., C.P. 03900
Tel: +52-55-5804-0600

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland
Tel: +48-22-880-08-88

Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: +31-347-358040

CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,
Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971-4-801-1500

MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi
Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz
Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey
Tel: +90-212-999-8010

ASIA
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: +86-400-051-7700

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: +852-2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Private Limited
Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A,
Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002,
Haryana, India
Tel: +91-124-485-3300

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)
Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: +62-21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil,
Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea
Tel: +82-2-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: +60-3-78030900

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited
Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,
Singapore 530202, Singapore
Tel: +65-6740-9200

TAIWAN

Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd.
2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist.
New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: +886-2-7741-8888

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: +66-2215-2622

VIETNAM

Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited
15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach
Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,
Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam
Tel: +84-8-3818-1122

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
http://asia.yamaha.com

OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
VIC 3006, Australia
Tel: +61-3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: +64-9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
http://asia.yamaha.com

DMI14

Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan
(For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrase 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

ZS53040

Published 04/2016 MWZC*.*- **C0
Printed in Indonesia

ZS53040

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Extract, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 2016:05:02 18:12:10+09:00
Modify Date                     : 2016:05:02 18:13:19+09:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2016:05:02 18:13:19+09:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:7c4ae62f-8c6f-4903-a8e9-d8948dba7d30
Instance ID                     : uuid:7bd76902-600f-4e54-a3a7-38d444dc5046
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 215

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Yamaha ELB 02_Owner's Manual Elb02 En Om C0

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation